Manual - Delta Electronics

Preface 

Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-VE Series. The VFD-VE Series is 

manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporates the latest microprocessor 

technology available. 

This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily 

maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following 

safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at hand 

and distribute to all users for reference. 

To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor 

drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before 

using VFD-VE series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes. 

Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions, 

please contact your dealer. 

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY. 

DANGER! 

1. AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made. 

2. A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power 

has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before 

opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage 

levels. 

3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring. 

4. The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the 

input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and 

W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply. 

5. Ground the VFD-VE using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the 

laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring 

Diagram. 

6. VFD-VE series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1phase 

motors or other purpose. 

7. VFD-VE series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.

WARNING! 

1. DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive 

easily damage by high-voltage. 

2. There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components 

are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not 

touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands. 

3. Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. 

CAUTION! 

1. Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power. 

2. DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight, 

high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic 

particles. 

3. Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or 

electric shock. 

4. To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the 

equipment. 

5. When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the 

motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output 

reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details. 

6. The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the mains 

supply current capacity must be ≤ 5000A RMS (≤10000A RMS for the ≥ 40hp (30kW) models).

Table of Contents 

Preface ............................................................................................................. i 

Table of Contents .......................................................................................... iii 

Chapter 1 Introduction................................................................................ 1-1 

1.1 Receiving and Inspection ................................................................... 1-2 

1.1.1 Nameplate Information................................................................ 1-2 

1.1.2 Model Explanation ...................................................................... 1-2 

1.1.3 Series Number Explanation ........................................................ 1-3 

1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances ................................................. 1-3 

1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring ............................................... 1-4 

1.2.1 Ambient Conditions..................................................................... 1-4 

1.2.2 Remove Keypad ......................................................................... 1-6 

1.2.3 Remove Front Cover................................................................... 1-7 

1.2.4 Lifting .......................................................................................... 1-8 

1.3 Dimensions......................................................................................... 1-9 

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring .............................................................. 2-1 

2.1 Wiring ................................................................................................. 2-2 

2.2 External Wiring ................................................................................... 2-4 

2.3 Main Circuit ........................................................................................ 2-5 

2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection.............................................................. 2-5 

2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals ................................................................ 2-9

2.4 Control Terminals .............................................................................2-10 

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up ....................................3-1 

3.1 Digital Keypad KPV-CE01 ..................................................................3-1 

3.1.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01 ..............................3-1 

3.1.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01...........................3-3 

3.1.3 Dimension of the Digital Keypad .................................................3-5 

3.1.4 Reference Table for the LCD Display of the Digital Keypad........3-5 

3.1.5 Operation Method........................................................................3-6 

3.2 Tuning Operations ..............................................................................3-7 

3.2.1 Flow Chart...................................................................................3-7 

3.2.2 Explanations for the Tuning Steps.............................................3-10 

3.3.2.1 Step 1 ................................................................................3-10 

3.3.2.2 Step 2 ................................................................................3-11 

3.3.2.3 Step 3 ................................................................................3-12 

3.3.2.4 Step 4 ................................................................................3-13 

Chapter 4 Parameters..................................................................................4-1 

4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings.........................................................4-2 

4.2 Version Differences ..........................................................................4-26 

4.2.1 Version 2.02 ..............................................................................4-26 

4.2.2 Version 2.04 ..............................................................................4-29 

4.2.3 Version 2.05 ..............................................................................4-38 

4.3 Description of Parameter Settings ....................................................4-47 

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting .........................................................................5-1 

5.1 Over Current (OC) ..............................................................................5-1 

5.2 Ground Fault.......................................................................................5-2

5.3 Over Voltage (OV).............................................................................. 5-2 

5.4 Low Voltage (Lv) ................................................................................ 5-3 

5.5 Over Heat (oH1, oH2, oH3) ................................................................ 5-4 

5.6 Overload............................................................................................. 5-4 

5.7 Display of KPV-CE01 is Abnormal ..................................................... 5-5 

5.8 Phase Loss (PHL) .............................................................................. 5-5 

5.9 Motor cannot Run............................................................................... 5-6 

5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed..................................................... 5-7 

5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration....................................................... 5-8 

5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected .............................................. 5-8 

5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise ...................................................... 5-9 

5.14 Environmental Condition .................................................................. 5-9 

5.15 Affecting Other Machines ............................................................... 5-10 

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance................................ 6-1 

6.1 Fault Code Information....................................................................... 6-1 

6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions............................................... 6-1 

6.1.2 Reset .......................................................................................... 6-6 

6.2 Maintenance and Inspections............................................................. 6-7 

Appendix A Specifications ........................................................................ A-1 

Appendix B Accessories ........................................................................... B-1 

B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives..............B-1 

B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors ............................B-4 

B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit ......................................................B-6 

B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit..........................................................B-7

B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart ........................................................... B-9 

B.3 Fuse Specification Chart ................................................................. B-10 

B.4 AC Reactor...................................................................................... B-11 

B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value ...................................B-11 

B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value ................................B-11 

B.4.3 Applications for AC Reactor......................................................B-13 

B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) ................................................. B-15 

B.6 DC Choke Recommended Values................................................... B-16 

B.7 Remote Controller RC-01................................................................ B-17 

B.8 PG Card (for Encoder) .................................................................... B-18 

B.8.1 EMV-PG01X .............................................................................B-18 

B.8.2 EMV-PG01O.............................................................................B-22 

B.8.3 EMV-PG01L..............................................................................B-26 

B.9 AMD-EMI Filter Cross Reference .................................................... B-30 

B.9.1 Dimensions ...............................................................................B-33 

B.10 Multi-function I/O Extension Card.................................................. B-40 

B.10.1 Functions ................................................................................B-40 

B.10.2 Dimensions .............................................................................B-42 

B.10.3 Wiring......................................................................................B-42 

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive.............................. C-1 

C.1 Capacity Formulas ............................................................................ C-1 

C.2 General Precaution ........................................................................... C-3 

C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor....................................................... C-5

Chapter 1 Introduction 

The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain 

the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an 

extended period of time. Storage conditions are: 

CAUTION! 

1. Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes. 

2. Store within an ambient temperature range of -10 ° C to +40 ° C. 

3. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. 

4. Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA. 

5. DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding 

environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package. 

6. DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and 

frost. 

7. If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher 

than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation 

of the electrolytic capacitors. 

8. When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places 

with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above. 

Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction| 

1.1 Receiving and Inspection 

This VFD-VE AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before 

shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following: 

� Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick 

Start and CD. 

� Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment. 

� Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part 

number of your order. 

1.1.1 Nameplate Information 

Example for 5HP/3.7kW 3-phase 230V AC motor drive 

AC Drive Model 

Input Spec. 

Output Spec. 

Output Frequency Range 

Enclosure type 

Serial Number & Bar Code 

1.1.2 Model Explanation 

MODE : VFD037V23A-2 

INPUT : 3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 19.6A 

OUTPUT : 3PH 0-240V 17A 6.5kVA 5HP 

Freq. Range : 0.00~600.00Hz 

ENCLOSURE: TYPE 1 

037V23A2T6360001 

VFD 037 V 23 A-2 

VFD-VE Series 

Version Type 

Mains Input Voltage 

23: 230V Three phase 43: 460V Three phase 

Vector Series 

Applicable motor capacity 

007: 1 HP(0.7kW) 150: 20HP(15kW) 

022: 3 HP(2.2kW) 220: 30 HP(22kW) 

037: 5 HP(3.7kW) 300: 40HP(30kW) 

055: 7.5HP(5.5kW) 370: 50 HP(37kW) 

075: 10 HP(7.5kW) 450: 60HP(45kW) 

110: 15 HP(11kW) 550: 75HP(55kW) 

750: 100HP(75kW) 

Series Name ( Variable Frequency Drive) 

1-2 Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05

1.1.3 Series Number Explanation 

037V23A2 T 7 36 

230V 3-phase 5HP(3.7kW) 


Production number 

Production week 

Production year 2007 

Production factory 

(T: Taoyuan, W: Wujian) 

Model 

If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are 

any problems, please contact your distributor. 

1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances 

1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B) 7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW (Frame C) 



15-30HP/11-22kW (Frame D) 40-100HP/30-75kW (Frame E) 

Frame Power range Models 

B (B1) 1-3hp (0.75-2.2kW) 

VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, 

VFD022V23A/43A-2 

B (B2) 5hp (3.7kW) VFD037V23A/43A-2 

C 7.5-15hp (5.5-11kW) VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2 

D 15-30hp (11-22kW) 

VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2, 

VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2 

E (E1) 40-60hp (30-45kW) VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2 

E (E2) 40-100hp (30-75kW) 

VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, 

VFD750V43C-2 

Please refer to Chapter 1.3 for exact dimensions. 

1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 

1.2.1 Ambient Conditions 

Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions: 


Operation 

Air Temperature: -10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 122°F) 

Relative Humidity:


CAUTION! 

1. Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause 

damage to the AC motor drive. 

2. Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty! 

3. Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions 

are not allowed. 

4. The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit 

for heat dissipation. 

5. The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor 

drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature. 

6. When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding 

temperature must be within -10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor 

drive in a space with bad ventilation. 

7. When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row 

with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a 

metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating. 

8. Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the 

heatsink. 

1.2.2 Remove Keypad 





1.2.3 Remove Front Cover 





1.2.4 Lifting 

Please carry only fully assembled AC motor drives as shown in the following. 

For 40-100HP (Frame E and E1) 

Step 1 Step 2 


Step 3 Step 4 

1.3 Dimensions 




Frame B 

W 

W1 

H1 

H 

1-10 Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 

S1 

D 

S2 

D1 

D2 

Unit: mm[inch] 

Frame W W1 H H1 D D1 D2 S1 S2 

B1 

B2 

150.0 

[5.91] 

150.0 

[5.91] 

NOTE 

135.0 

[5.32] 

135.0 

[5.32] 

260.0 

[10.24] 

272.1 

[10.72] 

244.3 

[9.63] 

244.3 

[9.63] 

160.2 

[6.31] 

183.7 

[7.24] 

67.0 

[2.64] 

67.0 

[2.64] 

4.0 

[0.16] 

4.0 

[0.16] 

Frame B1: VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2 

Frame B2: VFD037V23A/43A-2 

8.0 

[0.32] 

8.0 

[0.32] 

6.5 

[0.26] 

6.5 

[0.26]

Frame C 

W 

W1 

H1 

H 


Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 1-11 

D 

S1 S2 


Frame W W1 H H1 D - - S1 S2 

C 

200.0 

[7.88] 

NOTE 

185.6 

[7.31] 

323.0 

[12.73] 

244.3 

[9.63] 

160.2 

[6.31] 

- - 

Frame C: VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2 

7.0 

[0.28] 

7.0 

[0.28]


Frame D 

W 

W1 

H1 

H 


D 

S1 

D1 

D2 


Frame W W1 H H1 D D1 D2 S1 - 

D 

250.0 

[9.85] 

NOTE 

226.0 

[8.90] 

408.2 

[16.07] 

384.0 

[15.13] 

205.4 

[8.08] 

110.0 

[4.33] 

10.0 

[0.39] 

10.0 

[0.39] 

Frame D: VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2 

-

Frame E 

H 

W D 

W1 

H2 

H1 



S1 

S3 

D1 

S2 

D2 


Frame W W1 H H1 H2 D D1 D2 S1 S2 S3 

E1 

370.0 

[14.57] 

335.0 

[13.19] 

- 

589.0 

[23.19] 

560.0 

[22.05] 

260.0 

[10.24] 

370.0 335.0 595.0 589.0 560.0 260.0 

E2 

[14.57] [13.19] [23.43] [23.19] [22.05] [10.24] 

NOTE 

132.5 

[5.22] 

132.5 

[5.22] 

18.0 

[0.71] 

18.0 

[0.71] 

Frame E1: VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2 

Frame E2: VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2 

13.0 

[0.51] 

13.0 

[0.51] 

13.0 

[0.51] 

13.0 

[0.51] 

18.0 

[0.71] 

18.0 

[0.71]


This page intentionally left blank 


Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 

After removing the front cover (see chapter 1.2.3 for details), check if the power and control terminals 

are clear. Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring. 

� General Wiring Information 

Applicable Codes 

All VFD-VE series are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Canadian Underwriters 

Laboratories (cUL) listed, and therefore comply with the requirements of the National 

Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). 

Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions 

provided in “Wiring Notes” as a minimum standard. Follow all local codes that exceed UL 

and cUL requirements. Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and 

the motor nameplate for electrical data. 

The "Line Fuse Specification" in Appendix B, lists the recommended fuse part number for 

each VFD-VE Series part number. These fuses (or equivalent) must be used on all 

installations where compliance with U.L. standards is a required. 

CAUTION! 

1. Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may 

result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as 

indicated on the nameplate. 

2. Check following items after finishing the wiring: 

A. Are all connections correct? 

B. No loose wires? 

C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground? 

DANGER! 

1. A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power 

has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and 

wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC 

motor drive. 

2. All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike 

or electric shock. 

3. Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring 

and commissioning. 

4. Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock. 


Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 

2.1 Wiring 

Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a 

modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The 

pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad KPV-CE01 only and should not be used 

for RS-485 communication. 

Figure 1 for models of VFD-VE Series (15 HP/11kW and below) 

VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2, VFD037V23A/43A-2, 

VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2, VFD110V23A/43A-2 

DC choke 

(optional) 

Brake resistor 

(optional) 

Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker) 

R(L1) 

S(L2) 

T(L3) 

Recommended Circuit 

when power supply 

is turned OFF by a 

Jumper 

+1 +2/B1 

R(L1) 

S(L2) 

T(L3) 

E 

SA 

MC RB 

B2 - 

U(T1) 

V(T2) 

W(T3) 

E 

RA 

Motor 

IM 

3~ 

fault output. 

If the fault occurs, the OFF ON 

contact will be ON to turn 

MC 

off the power and protect the power system. 

Factory setting: 

FWD/STOP 

SINK Mode 

REV/STOP 

Sink 

Sw1 

Multi-step 1 

Factory 

Source 

setting 

Multi-step 2 

Please refer to 

Figure 3 for wiring 

Multi-step 3 

of SINK mode and Multi-step 4 

SOURCEmode. 

No function 

No function 

Digital Signal Common 

* Don't apply the mains voltage directly 

to above terminals. 

ACI current/voltage selection 

ACI Switch 

3 

Make sure that power is OFF 

before changing the switch 5K 2 

setting. 

1 

0-20mA 0-10V 

RC 

RB 

RC 

+24V 

MRA 

FWD 

REV 

MRC 

MI1 

MI2 MO1 

MI3 

MI4 

MI5 

MO2 

MI6 

DCM 

MCM 

E 

DFM 

+10V 

Power supply 

+10V 20mA 

AVI 

Master Frequency DCM 

0 to 10V 47k 

ACI 

4~20mA/0~10V 

AUI 

-10~+10V 

ACM 

Analog Signal Common 

Multi-function contact output 1 

(relay) 

factory setting: fault indication 


(relay) 

48VDC 50mA 

factory setting: 

indicates that it is running 


(photocoupler) 



Multi-function 

Photocoupler Output 

Digital Frequency Output 

Ter minal 

factory setting: 1:1 

Duty=50%, 10VDC 


DFM output signal selection 

DFM Switch 


before changing the switch 

setting. 

OC TP 

Analog Multi-function Output Terminal 

E 

AFM analog output selection 

AFM Switch 



setting. 

0-10V 0-20mA 

AFM 0~10VDC/2mA 

ACM 

Analog Signal common 

E 

RS-485 serial communication 

1: +EV 

2: GND For communication, 

3: SG- it needs to use 

4: SG+ VFD-USB01/IFD8500 

5: NC to connect to PC. 

6: NC 

Main circuit (power) terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded leads & Cable 

NOTE 

The brake resistor is built-in to model VFD110V43B. 



Figure 2 for models of VFD-VE Series (20HP/15kW and above) 

VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2, VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, 

VFD450V43A-2, VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2 

DC choke brake unit 

(optional) (optional) 

VFDB 

brake resistor 

(optional) 

Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker) 

Jumper 

-(minus sign) 

R(L1) 

S(L2) 

T(L3) 

+1 

R(L1) 

S(L2) 

T(L3) 

+2 

U(T1) 

V(T2) 

W(T3) 

Motor 

IM 

3~ 

Recommended Circuit 

when power s upply 

is turned OFF by a 

SA 

MC 

E 

RB 

E 

RA 

fault output. 

If the fault occurs, the OFF ON 

contact will be ON to turn 

MC 

off the power and protect the power system. 


FWD/STOP 

SINK Mode 

REV/STOP 

Sink 

Sw1 

Multi-step 1 

Factory 

Source 

setting 

Multi-step 2 


Multi-step 3 


of SINK mode and Multi-step 4 

SOURCEmode. 

No function 

No function 





ACI Switch 

3 



setting. 

1 

0-20mA 0-10V 

RC 

RB 

RC 

+24V 

MRA 

FWD 

REV 

MRC 

MI1 

MI2 MO1 

MI3 

MI4 

MI5 

MO2 

MI6 

DCM 

MCM 

E 

DFM 

+10V 

Power supply 

+10V 20mA 

AVI 

Master Frequency DCM 

0 to 10V 47k 

ACI 

4~20mA/0~10V 

AUI 

-10~+10V 

ACM 



(relay) 

factory setting: fault indication 


(relay) 

48VDC 50mA 

factory setting: 

indicates that it is running 






Photocoupler Output 

Digital Frequency Output 

Terminal 

factory setting: 1:1 

Duty=50%, 10VDC 


DFM output signal selection 

DFM Switch 



setting. 

OC TP 


E 


AFM Switch 



setting. 

0-10V 0-20mA 


ACM 


E 

RS-485 serial communication 

1: +EV 

2: GND For communication, 

3: SG- it needs to use 

4: SG+ VFD-USB01/IFD8500 

5: NC to connect to PC. 

6: NC 

Main circuit (power) terminals Control circuit terminals Shielded leads & Cable 

NOTE The brake resistor is built-in to model VFD110V43B. 



Figure 3 Wiring for SINK(NPN) mode and SOURCE(PNP) mode 

CAUTION! 

SINK/NPN Mode 

Sink 

SW1 

Source 

Factory 

setting 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

Multi-step1 

Multi-step2 

Multi-step3 

Multi-step4 

No Function 

No Function 


*Don't apply the mains voltage directly 


SOURCE/PNP Mode 

Sink 

FWD/STOP 

SW1 

REV/STOP 

Source 

Multi-step1 

Multi-step2 

Multi-step3 

Factory 

setting Multi-step4 

No Function 

No Function 

*Don't apply the mains voltage directly 


+24V 

FWD 

REV 

MI1 

MI2 

MI3 

MI4 

MI5 

MI6 

DCM 

E 

+24V 

FWD 

REV 

MI1 

MI2 

MI3 

MI4 

MI5 

MI6 

DCM 

E 

1. The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions. 

2. Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the 

terminal. 

3. Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield 

wire or tube. 

2.2 External Wiring 


Power Supply 

EMI Filter 

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 

Motor 

2.3 Main Circuit 

FUSE/NFB 

Magnetic 

contactor 

Input AC 

Line Reactor 

+/B1 

B2 

- 

Zero-phase 

Reactor 

E 

Break resistor 

(optional) 

Zero-phase 

Reactor 

Output AC 

Line Reactor 

Break unit (optional) 

BR 

Break resistor 

(optional) 

2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection 

Power 

supply 


Items Explanations 

Fuse/NFB 

(Optional) 

Magnetic 

contactor 

(Optional) 

Input AC 

Line Reactor 

(Optional) 

Zero-phase 

Reactor 

(Ferrite Core 

Common 

Choke) 

(Optional) 

EMI filter 

(Optional) 

Brake 

Resistor 

(Optional) 

Output AC 

Line Reactor 

(Optional) 

Please follow the specific power 

supply requirements shown in 

Appendix A. 

There may be an inrush current 

during power up. Please check the 

chart of Appendix B and select the 

correct fuse with rated current. Use of 

an NFB is optional. 

Please do not use a Magnetic 

contactor as the I/O switch of the AC 

motor drive, as it will reduce the 

operating life cycle of the AC drive. 

Used to improve the input power 

factor, to reduce harmonics and 

provide protection from AC line 

disturbances (surges, switching 

spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC 

line reactor should be installed when 

the power supply capacity is 500kVA 

or more or advanced capacity is 

activated .The wiring distance should 

be ≤ 10m. Refer to appendix B for 

details. 

Zero phase reactors are used to 

reduce radio noise especially when 

audio equipment is installed near the 

inverter. Effective for noise reduction 

on both the input and output sides. 

Attenuation quality is good for a wide 

range from AM band to 10MHz. 

Appendix B specifies the zero phase 

reactor. (RF220X00A) 

To reduce electromagnetic 

interference, please refer to Appendix 

B for more details. 

Used to reduce the deceleration time 

of the motor. Please refer to the chart 

in Appendix B for specific Brake 

Resistors. 

Motor surge voltage amplitude 

depends on motor cable length. For 

applications with long motor cable 

(>20m), it is necessary to install a 

reactor at the inverter output side 



Figure 1 for the main terminals 

No-fuse breaker 

(NFB) 

R 

S 

T 

Figure 2 for the main terminals 

R 

S 

T 


(NFB) 

MC 

MC 

Br ak e res istor(O pti onal) 

+1 +2/B1 B2 - 

R(L1) 

U(T1) 

S(L2) 

V(T2) 

T(L3) 

W(T3) 

E 

E 

VFDB 

+1 +2 - 

R(L1) 

U(T1) 

S(L2) 

V(T2) 

T(L3) 

W(T3) 

E 

E 

Brak e res istor 

(optional) 

Terminal Symbol Explanation of Terminal Function 

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals (1-phase/3-phase) 

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 

Motor 

IM 

3~ 

Motor 

IM 

3~ 

AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase 

induction motor 

+1, +2 Connections for DC Choke (optional) 

+2/B1, B2 Connections for Brake Resistor (optional) 

+2~(-), +2/B1~(-) Connections for External Brake Unit (VFDB series) 

Earth connection, please comply with local regulations. 


Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) 


� Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a no-fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker to 

3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection. It is 

unnecessary to consider phase-sequence. 

� It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off 

power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor 

drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber. 

� Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is 

made by the loose screws due to vibration. 

� Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A. 

� When using leakage-current breaker to prevent leakage current, 

� Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor drives 

by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC 

drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour. 

� Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source. 

Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W) 

� When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor 

terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively, the motor will rotate counterclockwise (as 

viewed on the shaft end of the motor) when a forward operation command is received. To 

permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation, switch over any of the two motor leads. 

Forward 

running 

� DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals 

of AC motor drives. 

� With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current, high 

leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable should 

be less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than 50m for 

5.5kW models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor. 

� Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation. 

Terminals [+1, +2] for connecting DC reactor 

DC reactor 

Jumper 

+1 



� To improve power factor and reduce harmonics connect a DC reactor between terminals [+1, 

+2]. Please remove the jumper before connecting the DC reactor. 

NOTE Models of 15kW and above have a built-in DC reactor. 

Terminals [+2/B1, B2] for connecting brake resistor and terminals [+1, +2/B1] for 

connecting external brake unit 

Brake resistor(optional) 

BR 

Brake unit(optional) 

VFDB 

Refer to Appendix B for the use of 

BR 

spec ial braking resis tor/unit 

+2/B1 B2 

+2/B1 

- 

� Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps, short 

deceleration time, too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque. 

� If the AC motor drive has a built-in brake chopper (all models of 11kW and below), connect 

the external brake resistor to the terminals [+2/B1, B2]. 

� Models of 15kW and above don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an external 

optional brake unit (VFDB-series) and brake resistor. Refer to VFDB series user manual for 

details. 

� Connect the terminals [+(P), -(N)] of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals 

[+2(+2/B1), (-)]. The length of wiring should be less than 5m with twisted cable. 

� When not used, please leave the terminals [+2/B1, -] open. 

WARNING! 

1. Short-circuiting [B2] or [-] to [+2/B1] can damage the AC motor drive. 

Grounding terminals ( ) 

� Make sure that the leads are connected correctly and the AC drive is properly grounded. 

(Ground resistance should not exceed 0.1Ω.) 

� Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible. 

� Multiple VFD-VE units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded 

directly to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no 

ground loops. 

excellent good not allowed 


2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals 

Frame B 

Frame C 

+1 +2 B1 - B2 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 

Screw Torque : 

18Kgf-cm 

Wire Gauge : 

18~10AWG 

POWER 

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 

IM MOTOR 

3 


Main circuit terminals 

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1, +2/B1, -, B2 

Models 

VFD007V23A-2 

VFD007V43A-2 

VFD015V23A-2 

Wire Torque Wire Type 

VFD015V43A-2 

VFD022V23A-2 

VFD022V43A-2 

VFD037V23A-2 

VFD037V43A-2 

14-10 AWG 

(2.1-5.3mm 2 ) 

18kgf-cm 

(15.6in-lbf) 

Stranded 

copper only, 

75 o C 


R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1, +2/B1, -, B2 

Models 

VFD055V23A-2 


VFD075V23A-2 

VFD110V43B-2 

VFD055V43A-2 

VFD075V43A-2 

12-8 AWG 

(3.3-8.4mm 2 ) 

30kgf-cm 

(26in-lbf) 

Stranded 

copper only, 

75 o C 



Frame D 

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1 +2 - V/T2 W/T3 

POWER DC ( + ) DC ( - ) IM 

3 MOTOR 

Frame E 

CHARGE 

POWER 

ALARM 

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1 +2 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 

Screw Torque: 

IM POWER 200kgf-cm (173in-lbf) 

3 MOTOR 

NOTE 


R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1, +2, - 

Models 

VFD110V23A-2 

VFD110V43A-2 

VFD150V43A-2 


VFD150V23A-2 

VFD185V23A-2 

VFD185V43A-2 

VFD220V43A-2 

VFD220V23A-2 

8-2 AWG 

(8.4-33.6mm 2 ) 

30kgf-cm 

(26in-lbf) 

Stranded 

copper only, 

75 o C 


R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1, +2, - 

Models Wire Torque Wire Type 

VFD300V43A-2 

VFD370V43A-2 

VFD450V43A-2 

4-2 AWG 

VFD300V23A-2 

(21.2-33.6mm 

VFD370V23A-2 

2 ) 

VFD550V43C-2 

VFD750V43C-2 

# To connect 6 AWG (13.3 mm 2 ) wires, use Recognized Ring Terminals 

2.4 Control Terminals 

57kgf-cm 

(49in-lbf) 

200kgf-cm 

(173in-lbf) 

Stranded 

copper 

only, 75 o C 



Circuit diagram for digital inputs (SINK current 16mA.) 

SINK Mode 

SOURCE Mode 

multi-input 

terminal 

MRA 

DCM 

RA 

MRC RB 

+24 

Internal Circuit 

Multi-Input 

Terminal 


+24V 

The Position of the Control Terminals 

DCM 


RC 

MCM +24V FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 DFM +10V AVI ACM 

MO1 MO2 DCM REV MI2 MI4 MI6 AFM AUI 

ACI


Terminal symbols and functions 

Terminal 

Symbol 

Terminal Function 

FWD Forward-Stop Command 

REV Reverse-Stop Command 

Factory Settings (SINK) 

ON: Connect to DCM 

ON: Run in FWD direction 

OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method 

ON: Run in REV direction 

OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method 

+24V DC Voltage Source +24VDC, 80mA, used for SOURCE mode. 

MI1 Multi-function Input 1 






DFM 

Digital Frequency Meter 

(Open Collector Output) 

DFM-DCM 

Max: 48V 

50mA 

J5 

50% 

internal circuit 

DCM Digital Signal Common 

RA 

RB 

100% 

Multi-function Relay Output 1 

(N.O.) a 


(N.C.) b 

RC Multi-function Relay Common 

MRA 


(N.O.) a 

MRC Multi-function Relay Common 

Refer to Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06 for programming 

the Multi-function Inputs. 

ON: the activation current is 6.5mA. OFF: 

leakage current tolerance is 10μA. 

Pulse voltage output monitor signal, 

proportional to output frequency 

Duty-cycle: 50% 

Ratio: Pr.02-18 

Min. load: 4.7kΩ 

Max. current: 50mA 

Max. voltage: 48Vdc 

Jumper: DFM jumper, factory 

setting is OC 

Common for digital inputs and used for SINK 

mode. 

Resistive Load: 

5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC 

5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC 

Inductive Load: 

1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC 

1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC 

To output monitor signal, including in operation, 

frequency arrival, overload and etc. 

Refer to Pr.02-11~02-12 for programming 


Terminal 

Symbol 





+10V Potentiometer Power Supply +10VDC 20mA (variable resistor 3-5kohm) 

MCM 

MO1 

MO2 

AVI 

ACI 

AUI 

Multi-function Output 

Common (Photocoupler) 

Multi-function Output 1 

(Photocoupler) 


(Photocoupler) 

Analog voltage Input 

+10V 

AVI 

ACM 

AVI circuit 


Analog current Input 

ACI circuit 

ACI 

ACM 


Max. 48VDC 50mA 

Maximum 48VDC, 50mA 

Refer to Pr.02-13 to Pr.02-14 for programming 

MO1~MO2-DCM 

MO1~MO2 


MCM 


Impedance: 200kΩ 

Max: 48Vdc 

50mA 

Resolution: 12 bits 

Range: 0 ~ 10VDC = 0 ~ Max. Output 

Frequency (Pr.01-00) 

Set-up: Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02 

Impedance: 250Ω 

Resolution: 12 bits 

Range: 4 ~ 20mA/0~10V = 

0 ~ Max. Output Frequency 

(Pr.01-00) 

Set-up: Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02 

Jumper: ACI jumper, factory setting is 

4-20mA 

Auxiliary analog voltage input 

+10 

~ AUI circuit 

-10V 

Impedance: 

Resolution: 

Range: 

200kΩ 

12 bits 

-10 ~ +10VDC = 

0 ~ Max. Output Frequency 

AUI 

(Pr.01-00) 

ACM 


Set-up: Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02


Terminal 

Symbol 

AFM 

ACM 


Analog output meter 

AFM 

ACM 

Analog control signal 

(common) 

0~20mA 



Impedance: 18.5kΩ (voltage output) 

1.1mΩ (current output) 

Output current 20mA max 

Resolution: max. frequency corresponds to 

0-10V 

Range: 0 ~ 10V/0 ~ 20mA 

Function: Pr.03-18 

Switch: AFM switch, factory setting is 0- 

10V 

Common for AVI, ACI, AUI, AFM 

*Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm 2 ) with shielded wire. 

Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM) 

� Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as 

short as possible (

General 


� Keep control wiring as far as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to 

avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle. 

� The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power 

wiring or terminals. 

NOTE 

� If a filter is required for reducing EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference), install it as close as 

possible to AC drive. EMI can also be reduced by lowering the Carrier Frequency. 

� When using a GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor with sensitivity 

of 200mA, and not less than 0.1-second detection time to avoid nuisance tripping. 

DANGER! 

Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes 

in contact with high voltage. 

The specification for the control terminals 

The Position of the Control Terminals 

MRA RA 

MRC RB 

NOTE 

RC 

MCM +24V FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 DFM +10V AVI ACM 

MO1 MO2 DCM REV MI2 MI4 MI6 AFM AUI 

Frame Torque Wire 


ACI 

B, C, D, E, E1 8 kgf-cm (6.9 in-lbf) 22-14 AWG (0.3-2.1mm 2 ) 

Frame B: VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2, VFD037V23A/43A-2; 

Frame C: VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2, 

Frame D: VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2 

Frame E: VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2 

Frame E1: VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up 

3.1 Digital Keypad KPV-CE01 

3.1.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01 

MODE Selection Key 

Press this key to view different 

operating values 

Left Key 

moves cursor to the left 

FWD/REV Direction Key 

RUN key 

F 

H 

U 

JOG 

KPV-CE01 

EXTPU 

STOP 

RUN RESET 

LED Display 

Display frequency, current, voltage 

and error, etc. 

Part Number 

Status Display 

Display of driver status 

STOP/RESET 


PU 

Display Message Descriptions 

Displays the AC drive Master Frequency. 

Right Key 

Moves the cursor right 

Displays the actual output frequency present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and 

W/T3. 

User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00-05) 

Displays the output current present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. 

The counter value (C).

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up| 

Display Message Descriptions 

Displays the selected parameter. 

Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter. 

External Fault. 

Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by 

pressing key. After a parameter value has been set, the new 

value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the 

, and keys. 

Display “Err”, if the input is invalid. 


F 

H 

U 


3.1.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01 

START 

F 

H 

U 

Selection mode 

To set parameters 

F 

H 

U 

To shift cursor 

START 

To modify data 

START 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

NOTE: In the selection mode, press 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

MODE 

MODE 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

NOTE: In the parameter setting mode, you can press 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

START 

MODE 

To switch display mode 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

MODE MODE 

F 

H 

U 

MODE 


MODE 

to set the parameters. 

move to previous display 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

MODE 

F 

H 

U 

parameter set successfully 

to return to the selection mode. 

F 

H 

U 

parameter set error 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

MODE 

GO START 

F 

H 

U


F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

To copy parameters 1 

Copy parameters from the AC Motor Drive to the KPV-CE01 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

start blinking It will display "End" to indicate that 

the first parameter is saved, then 

return to "rEAd0". 

To copy parameters 2 

F 

H 

U 


F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

start blinking It will display "End" to indicate that 

about 2-3 seconds 

the second parameter is saved, then 

return to "rEAd1". 

Copy parameters from the KPV-CE01 to the AC Motor Drive 


F 

H 

U 

start blinking 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

H 

U 

F 

F 

H 

H 

U 

U 

It will display "End" to indicate that 

the first parameter is saved, then 

return to "SAvEv". 

F 

H 

U 

F 

F 

H 

H 

U 

U 

start blinking 


F 

H 

U 


F 

H 

U 

F 

F 

H 

H 

U 

U 

It will display "End" to indicate that 

the second parameter is saved, then 

return to "SAvEv".

3.1.3 Dimension of the Digital Keypad 

F 

H 

U 

JOG 

FWD 

REV 

RUN 

MODE 

KPV-CEO1 

RUN STOP JOGFWD REV EXT PU 

PU 

PROG 

DATA 

STOP 

RESET 


3.1.4 Reference Table for the LCD Display of the Digital Keypad 

Digital 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

LCD 

English 

alphabet 

LCD 

English 

alphabet 

LCD 

English 

alphabet 

LCD 

A b Cc d E F G Hh I Jj 

K L n Oo P q r S Tt U 

v Y Z 

Unit: mm [inch] 


LABEL 1


3.1.5 Operation Method 

Refer to 3.1.2 How to operate the digital keypad KPV-CE01 and chapter 4 parameters for 

setting. Please choose a suitable method depending on application and operation rule. The 

operation is usually used as shown in the following table. 

Operation Method Frequency Source 

KPV-CE01 keypad 

Operate from 

external signal 

Operate from 

communication 


SINK Mode 

Sink 

Sw1 

Factory 

Source setting 



of SINK mode and 

SOURCEmode. 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

Multi-step 1 

Multi-step 2 

Multi-step 3 

Multi-step 4 

No function 

No function 



to abov e terminals. 


ACI Switch 

3 



setting. 

0-20mA 0-10V 

1 



AFM Switch 



setting. 

0-10V 0-20mA 

Main circuit (power) terminals 

Operation Command 

Source 

STOP 

RUN RESET 

+24V 

FWD 

REV 

MI1 

MI2 

MI3 

MI4 

MI5 

MI6 

DCM 

E 

+10V 

Power supply 

+10V 20mA 

AVI 

Master Frequency 

0 to 10V 47k 

ACI 

4~20mA/0~10V 

AUI 

-10~+10V 

ACM 


E 


ACM 


E 

Control circuit terminals Shielded leads & Cable 

Please refer to the communication address 2000H and 2119H settings in the 

communication address definition. 


3.2 Tuning Operations 

3.2.1 Flow Chart 

Take motor 1 as example 

Step 1 

Basic parameters settings 

Reset all parameters 

to factory setting 

Pr.00-02 

Setting the related 

information of IM motor 

Pr.01-00~01-02 

Pr.05-01~05-04 

If the motor and 

load can be 

separated 

YES 

run in low speed 

Check if output current 

is within (20~50%) of 

rated current 

YES 

Stop running 

Motor auto tuning 

Pr.05-00=1 

NO 

NO 


Step 2 Motor tuning 

No-load current of motor 

Pr.05-05 

Motor auto tuning 

Pr.05-00=2 

If it displays "tun" 

during trial run 

Please contact 

motor supplier 


YES 

The motor tuning is 

finished after motor 

is stopped. 

Check if the value 

has been written 

into Pr.05-05~05-09 

NO 

If it displays "AUE", 

please check the 

wiring and parameter 

settings.


Step 3 Trial run for FOCPG feedback control 

Selection of speed 

feedback card 

E MV-P G01X 

E MV-P G01O 

E MV-P G01L 

Encoder pulse 

Pr.10-00 

Encoder input type setting 

Pr.10-01 

Pr.00-10=3 

FOCPG control mode 

If the motor can run YES 

NO 

Stop trial run 

Check if PG card 

is nor mal 


NO 

Check if output 

current is normal 

YES 

Change the operation 

direction of motor 

Increase the 

frequency command 

Finish trial run 

YES 

NO 

Refer to chapter 6 

for fault c ode 

Check the setting 

of Pr.10-00 

If there is 

mechanical 

gear 

YES 

Check the setting of 

gear ratio (Pr.10-27~ 

10-28)

Step 4 Inertia estimation 

Connect the load and motor 

Adjust accel./decel. time 

Pr.01-12~01-13 

Pr.11-00=2 

If it allows the motor 

to forward/reverse 

running 

YES 

Set the operation frequency 

to 2/3 of motor rated 

frequency 

operate the motor 

observe Pr.11-01 

and adjust the 

operation direction 

NO 


adjust multi-step speed 

MI1=1, set Pr.04-00 to 1/5 of 

rated frequency and operation 

frequency to 4/5 of rated frequency 

operate the motor 

observe Pr.11-01 and 

set Pr.02-10 to 4 or 0 

Check if Pr.11-01 

setti ng is 

convergence 


YES 

Stop motor running 

record Pr.11-01 

Pr.11-00=0 

Finish trial run 

NO 

Check accel./decel. time 

and operation frequency 

setting


3.2.2 Explanations for the Tuning Steps 

3.3.2.1 Step 1 

Basic parameters settings for the motor 

� Make sure that Pr.00-00 (identity code of the AC motor drive) corresponds with the 

nameplate indicated on the AC motor drive. 

� Make sure that all parameters are reset to factory setting (Pr.00-02 is set to 9 or 10). 

Pr.00-02 

Parameter Reset 

0: No function 

1: Read only 

2: Enable group 11 parameters setting 

8: Keypad lock 

9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 

220V/380V) 


220V/440V) 

� Enter the related information of the motor into Pr.01-00~01-02 and Pr.05-01~05-04 

Pr.01-00 

50.00 ~ 600.00Hz 

Max. Output Frequency 

Pr.01-01 

1st Output Frequency 

Setting 1 

Pr.01-02 

1st Output Voltage 

Setting 1 

Pr.05-01 

Full-load Current of 

Motor 1 (A) 

0.00~600.00Hz 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

40~120% of drive’s rated current 

NOTE: This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the 

motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% of the rated current. 

Pr.05-02 

Rated Power of Motor 1 

(kW) 

0~655.35 

NOTE: It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive. 


Pr.05-03 

Rated Speed of Motor 1 

(rpm) 


0~65535 

NOTE: It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and needs to set according to the value indicated 

on the motor nameplate. 

Pr.05-04 

Number of Motor 

Poles 1 

2~20 

NOTE: it is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number). 

� Check if the motor and load can be separated. If yes, please set by the following steps. If not, 

please jump to step 2 for static test of the motor auto tuning. 

� If the above steps are normal, please trial run in low speed and check if the motor runs 

steadily without abnormal noise and vibration. If yes, please stop running and check if the 

wiring is correct or contact the motor supplier. 

� After ensure that the output current displayed on the digital keypad is within 20~50% of the 

motor rated current when trial run in low speed, please go to step 2. If the output current is 

out of the range, please check the motor wiring, parameter settings or contact the motor 

supplier. 

3.3.2.2 Step 2 

Motor tuning 

� Make sure that Pr.00-00 (identity code of the AC motor drive) corresponds to the nameplate 

of the AC motor drive. 

� Check if the motor and load can be disconnected. 

If yes: set Pr.05-00 to 1 (rolling test) 

If not: it needs to input value into Pr.05-05 and set Pr.05-00 to 2 (static test) 

� Motor auto tuning 

Pr.05-00 


Motor Auto Tuning 1: Rolling test 

2: Static Test 

3: Reserved 

� It will display on the digital keypad until the tuning is finished. Then the motor 

will stop automatically and save the value into Pr.05-06~Pr.05-09. If it displays 

, please check if the wiring and parameters settings are correct. 



3.3.2.3 Step 3 

Trial run for FOCPG feedback control 

� Selection for speed feedback card 

Please refer to Appendix B PG card for selection. Delta provides 3 PG cards, including EMV- 

PG01X, EMV-PG01O and EMV-PG01L, for your selection. 

� Encoder pulse 

Pr.10-00 

1~20000 

Encoder Pulse 

� Selection for encoder input type 

Pr.10-01 

Encoder Input Type 

Setting 

� Set it to FOCPG mode 

Pr.00-10 

Control Method 

0: Disable 

1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B 

leads in a reverse run command 

2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A 

leads in a reverse run command 

3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction 

input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward 

direction) 


input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse 

direction) 

5: Single-phase input 

0: V/f Control 

1: V/f Control + Encoder (VFPG) 

2: Sensorless vector control (SVC) 

3: FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG) 

4: Torque control + Encoder (TQCPG) 

� Check if the PG feedback card is normal 

1. check if the actual output frequency reaches the frequency command 

2. When the PG feedback card is abnormal, the fault code. 

Check if Pr.10-01 is set to 0 

Check if the wiring of the feedback card is correct 

Check if the wiring of the feedback card, PI gain parameter 

is correct or adjust decel./accel. time 

Check if the wiring of the feedback card, PI gain parameter 

is correct or adjust decel./accel. time 

� After the fault is cleared, please trial run again. 

� Check if the output current is normal 

When changing frequency command, check if the output current is increased or decreased 

abnormally. If it is abnormal, please check if Pr.10-00 and Pr.10-27~Pr.10-28 are correct. 

� Changing the rotation direction of the motor 

Adjust the rotation direction of the motor to ensure that it can run in all the rotation directions. 

� Increase the frequency command 

Check if the output current/frequency and motor actual speed(it can set Pr.00-04=7 during 

operation) is normal in different commands. 

� Finish trial run 

If the results of trial run are normal, the trial run in FOCPG mode is completed. 


3.3.2.4 Step 4 


Inertia estimate 

� Check if the load and motor are connected correctly 

� Adjust accel./decel. time 

The setting of accel./decel. time(Pr.01-12~Pr.01-13) can be lessened when the 

current/voltage is within specification (no fault code(over current/voltage) occurs). 

Pr.01-12 

Accel Time 1 

Pr.01-13 

Decel Time 1 

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 

NOTE: The accel. time is the time that needs for drive to accelerate from 0.0Hz to max. operation 

frequency (Pr.1-00). The decel, tome is the time that needs for drive to decelerate from max. 

operation frequency (Pr.01-00) to 0.00Hz. 

� Inertia estimate 

Setting Pr.11-00=2 

Pr.11-00 

System Control 

bit 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR 

bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode) 

bit 2: Zero Servo 

bit 3: Reserved 

� If it allows the motor to rotate in forward and reverse 

 

After start-up the motor, observe if Pr.11-01 is convergence. After the speed is stable, 

change the motor operation direction until Pr.11-01 is convergence. 

 

Setting multi-function input terminal to MI1=1, Pr.04-00 to 1/5 of rated frequency and the 

operation frequency on the digital keypad to 4/5 of rated frequency. 

Pr.04-00 

0.00~600.00Hz 

1st Step Speed 

Frequency 

� Check if the setting of Pr.11-01 is convergence 

When the motor runs stably,setting Pr.02-10 to 4 and check if Pr.11-01 is convergence. After 

setting Pr.02-10 to 0, check if Pr.11-01 is convergence again. Please repeat above operation 

until Pr.11-01 is convergence. 

Pr.02-10 

Digital Input Operation 

Direction 

0 ~ 65535 



This page intentionally left blank. 


Chapter 4 Parameters 

The VFD-VE parameters are divided into 12 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications, 

the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during 

operation. 

The 12 groups are as follows: 

Group 0: System Parameters 

Group 1: Basic Parameters 

Group 2: Digital Input/Output Parameters 

Group 3: Analog Input/Output Parameters 

Group 4: Multi-Step Speed Parameters 

Group 5: Motor Parameters 

Group 6: Protection Parameters 

Group 7: Special Parameters 

Group 8: High-function PID Parameters 

Group 9: Communication Parameters 

Group 10: Speed Feedback Control Parameters 

Group 11: Advanced Parameters 


Chapter 4 Parameters| 

4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings 

�: The parameter can be set during operation. 

Group 0 System Parameters 

Pr. 

00-00 

Explanation 

Identity Code of the AC 

motor drive 

Read-only 

Settings 

Factory 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG 

Setting 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

00-01 

Rated Current Display of 

the AC motor drive 

Read-only 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


1: Read only 

2: Enable group 11 parameters setting 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

00-02 Parameter Reset 

8: Keypad lock 


220V/380V) 


220V/440V) 

0: Display the frequency command value (LED F) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

1: Display the actual output frequency (LED H) 

�00-03 Start-up Display Selection 

2: Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U) 

3: Display the output current (A) 

0: Display output current (A) 

1: Display counter value (C) 

2: Display output frequency (H) 

3: Display DC-BUS voltage ( 

Content of Multi Function 

�00-04 Display 

u ) 

4: Display output voltage (E) 

5: Output power factor angle (n) 

6: Display output power (kW) 

7: Display actual motor speed (r) 

8: Display estimate output torque in N-m (t) 

9: Display PG position (G) 

10: Display PID feedback in % (b) 

11: Display AVI in % (1.) 

12: Display ACI in % (2.) 

13: Display AUI in % (3.) 

14: Display the temperature of heat sink in °C (t.) 

15: Display the temperature of IGBT in °C (T) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) (i) 

17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF) (o) 

18: Multi-step speed (S) 

19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (i.) 

20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output 

(o.) 

21: Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) 

(Z) 

22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (4) 

23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (4.) 

24: Pulse position control for whole operation (MI=37 

and MI=ON) (P.) 

25: Display the present reel diameter under the tension 

control in mm (d) 

26: Display the present line speed under the tension 

control in m/min (L) 

27: Display the present tension setting under the tension 

control in N (T.) 

Digit 4: decimal point number (0 to 3) 

�00-05 User-Defined Coefficient K 

Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

00-06 Software Version Read-only #.# ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�00-07 Password Input 

1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535 

0 to 2: times of wrong password 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�00-08 Password Set 

0: No password set or successful input in Pr.00-07 

1: Password has been set 

�00-09 Energy Saving Gain 10~1000 % 100% ○ 

0: V/f Control 

1: V/f Control + Encoder (VFPG) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

00-10 Control Method 

2: Sensorless vector control (SVC) 

3: FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG) 

4: Torque control + Encoder (TQCPG) 


Pr. Explanation Settings 

00-11 

�00-12 

�00-13 

V/f Curve Selection 

Constant/Variable Torque 

Selection 

Optimal 

Acceleration/Deceleration 

Setting 

0: V/f curve determined by group 01 

1: 1.5 power curve 

2: Square curve 

0: Constant Torque (150%) 

1: Variable Torque (120%) 

0: Linear accel./decel. I 

1: Auto accel., linear decel. 

2: Linear accel., auto decel. 

3: Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. 

time by actual load) 

4: Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 


Factory 


Setting 

0 ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Time Unit for 

to 01-21) 

0: Unit: 0.01 second 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

00-14 Acceleration/Deceleration 

and S Curve 

1: Unit: 0.1 second 

00-15 Reserved 


�00-17 Carrier Frequency 1~15KHz 10 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Auto Voltage Regulation 

�00-18 (AVR) Function 

0: Enable AVR 

1: Disable AVR 

2: Disable AVR when deceleration stop 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Auto Energy-saving 

�00-19 Operation 

0: Disable 

1: Enable 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�00-20 

�00-21 

Source of the Master 

Frequency Command 

Source of the Operation 

Command 

�00-22 Stop Method 

�00-23 Motor Direction Control 

0: Digital keypad (KPV-CE01) 

1: RS-485 serial communication 

2: External analog input (Pr. 03-00) 

3: External UP/DOWN terminal 

4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-15 

without direction) 

5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-15) 

0: Digital keypad (KPV-CE01) 

1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled. 

2: RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Keypad STOP 

disabled. 

0: Ramp to stop 

1: Coast to stop 

0: Enable forward/reverse 

1: Disable reverse 

2: Disable forward 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



Group 1 Basic Parameters 


Factory 


Setting 

01-00 

Maximum Output 

Frequency 

50.00~600.00Hz 60.00/ 

50.00 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-01 

1st Output Frequency 

Setting 1 

0.00~600.00Hz 60.00/ 

50.00 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-02 


Setting 1 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

220.0 

440.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-03 

2nd Output Frequency 

Setting 1 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.50 ○ ○ 

�01-04 

2nd Output Voltage 

Setting 1 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

5.0 

10.0 

○ ○ 

01-05 

3rd Output Frequency 

Setting 1 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.50 ○ ○ 

�01-06 

3rd Output Voltage 

Setting 1 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

5.0 

10.0 

○ ○ 

01-07 

4th Output Frequency 

Setting 1 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-08 

4th Output Voltage 

Setting 1 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

0.0 

0.0 

○ ○ 

01-09 Start Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0.50 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-10 

Output Frequency Upper 

0.00~600.00Hz 

Limit 

600.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-11 

Output Frequency Lower 

0.00~600.00Hz 

Limit 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-12 

�01-13 

Accel Time 1 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 

10.00/ 

10.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

Decel Time 1 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec �01-14 

10.00/ 

10.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

Accel Time 2 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec �01-15 

10.00/ 

10.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 


10.00/ 

10.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

Accel Time 3 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec �01-17 

10.00/ 

10.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 


10.00/ 

10.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

Accel Time 4 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 10.00/ 

10.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-19 Decel Time 4 

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 10.00/ 

10.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-20 JOG Acceleration Time 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 

1.00/ 

1.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-21 JOG Deceleration Time 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 

1.00/ 

1.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-22 JOG Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 6.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-23 

1st/4th Accel/decel 

Frequency 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-24 

S-curve for Acceleration 

Departure Time 1 

0.00~25.00 sec/0.00~250.0 sec 0.2/0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-25 

S-curve for Acceleration 

Arrival Time 2 

0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec 0.2/0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-26 

S-curve for Deceleration 0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec 

Departure Time 1 

0.2/0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-27 

S-curve for Deceleration 0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec 

Arrival Time 2 

0.2/0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-28 

Skip Frequency 1 (upper 0.00~600.00Hz 

limit) 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-29 

Skip Frequency 1 (lower 0.00~600.00Hz 

limit) 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-30 


limit) 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-31 


limit) 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-32 


limit) 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-33 


limit) 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-34 

Mode Selection when 

Frequency < Fmin 

0: Output Waiting 

1: Zero-speed operation 

2: Fmin (4th output frequency setting) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-35 1st Output Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 60.00/ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 


Setting 

Setting 2 50.00 

01-36 


Setting 2 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

220.0 

440.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

01-37 

2nd Output Frequency 

Setting 2 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.50 ○ ○ 

�01-38 

2nd Output Voltage 

Setting 2 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

5.0/ 

10.0 

○ ○ 

01-39 

3rd Output Frequency 

Setting 2 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.50 ○ ○ 

�01-40 

3rd Output Voltage 

Setting 2 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

5.0/ 

10.0 

○ ○ 

01-41 

4th Output Frequency 

Setting 2 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�01-42 

4th Output Voltage 

Setting 2 

230V: 0.1V~255.0V 

460V: 0.1V~510.0V 

0.0/ 

0.0 

○ ○ 



Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters 


Factory 


Setting 

02-00 2-wire/3-wire Operation 0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Control 

1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout) 

2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD 

3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout) 

4: 3-wire (momentary push button) 

5: 3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start 

Lockout) 

02-01 Multi-Function Input 0: no function 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Command 1 (MI1) 

(it is Stop terminal for 3wire 

operation) 

1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position 

command 1 

2: multi-step speed command 2/ multi-step position 

command 2 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

02-02 

3: multi-step speed command 3/ multi-step position 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Multi-Function Input command 3 

Command 2 (MI2) 4: multi-step speed command 4/ multi-step position 

command 4 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-03 Multi-Function Input 5: Reset 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Command 3 (MI3) 6: JOG command 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-04 Multi-Function Input 7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Command 4 (MI4) 8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-05 Multi-Function Input 9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Command 5 (MI5) 10: EF input (Pr.07-36) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-06 Multi-Function Input 


11: B.B. input 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

(specific terminal for 

TRG) 

12: Output stop 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-23 Multi-Function Input 13: cancel the setting of the optimal 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Command 7 

acceleration/deceleration time 


Command 8 

14: switch between drive settings 1 and 2 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 9 

15: operation speed command form AVI 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 10 

16: operation speed command form ACI 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 11 

17: operation speed command form AUI 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 12 

18: Emergency Stop (Pr.07-36) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 13 

19: Digital Up command 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 14 

20: Digital Down command 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

21: PID function disabled ○ ○ ○ ○ 

22: clear counter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

23: input the counter value (multi-function input 

command 6) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

24: FWD JOG command ○ ○ ○ ○ 

25: REV JOG command ○ ○ ○ ○ 

26: TQCPG/FOCPG mode selection ○ ○ 

27: ASR1/ASR2 selection ○ ○ 

28: Emergency stop (EF1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection ○ ○ ○ ○ 

30: Signal confirmation for Δ−connection ○ ○ ○ ○ 

31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

34: Enable multi-step position control ○ ○ 

35: Enable position control ○ ○ 

36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid 

at stop) 

○ ○ 

37: Enable pulse position input command ○ ○ 

38: Disable write EEPROM function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

39: Torque command direction ○ 

40: Force stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

41: Serial position clock ○ 

42: Serial position input ○ 




Factory 


Setting 

43: Analog input resolution selection ○ 

44: Enable initial reel diameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

45: Reset initial reel diameter 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


47: Reset PID control integration of tension ○ ○ ○ ○ 

48: Mechanical gear ratio switch ○ ○ ○ 

49: Enable Drive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

50: Reserved 

02-07 UP/DOWN Key Mode 

0: up/down by the accel/decel time 

1: up/down constant speed (Pr.02-08) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

The 

0.01 ~ 1.00Hz/ms 0.01 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


02-08 Speed of the UP/DOWN 

Key with Constant Speed 

02-09 

Digital Input Response 

Time 

0.001~ 30.000 sec 0.005 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-10 

Digital Input Operation 

Direction 

0 ~ 65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-11 


RA, RB, RC(Relay1) 


1: Operation indication 

11 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

Multi-function Output 2 2: Operation speed attained 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-12 MRA, MRC (Relay2) 3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Multi-function Output 3 4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-21) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-13 

(MO1) 

5: Zero speed (frequency command) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-06~06-08) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


02-14 


(MO2) 

9: Drive ready 

10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection 

0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

11: Malfunction indication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-35 


(MO3) 

12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31) 

13: Overheat 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

14: Software brake signal indication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-36 


(MO4) 

15: PID feedback error 

16: Slip error (oSL) 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-16) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-37 


(MO5) 

18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17) 

19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

20: Warning output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-38 


(MO6) 

21: Over voltage warning 

22: Over-current stall prevention warning 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning ○ ○ ○ 

02-39 


(MO7) 

24: Operation mode indication 

25: Forward command 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

26: Reverse command ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-40 


(MO8) 

27: Output when current >= Pr.02-32 

28: Output when current < Pr.02-32 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-41 


(MO9) 

30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33 

31: Y-connection for the motor coil 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

32: Δ connection for the motor coil ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-42 


(MOA) 

33: Zero speed (actual output frequency) 

34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency) 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




39: Position attained (Pr.10-19) ○ 

40: Speed attained (including zero speed) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

41: Multi-position attained ○ 

42: Crane function ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


43: Motor zero-speed output (Pr.02-43) ○ ○ 

44: Max. reel diameter attained ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

45: Empty reel diameter attained ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

46: Broken belt detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

47: Break release at stop ○ ○ ○ ○ 

48: Error PID feedback of tension ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

49: Reserved 

50: Reserved 

�02-15 Multi-output Direction 0 ~ 65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-16 Terminal Count Value 0 ~ 65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-17 

Preliminary Counter 

Value 

0 ~ 65535 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-18 Digital Output Gain 1 ~ 40 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-19 

Desired Frequency 

Attained 1 

0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 

60.00/ 

50.00 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-20 

The Width of the Desired 

0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 

Frequency Attained 1 

2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-21 


Attained 2 

0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 

60.00/ 

50.00 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-22 

The Width of the Desired 

0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 

Frequency Attained 2 

2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-31 

Brake Delay Time 0.000~65.000 Sec 0.000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-32 

Output Current Level 

Setting for External 

Terminals 

0~100% 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-33 

Output Boundary for 

External Terminals 

0.00~+-60.00Hz (it is motor speed when using PG) 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-34 

External Operation 

Control Selection after 

Reset 

0: Disable 

1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-43 

Zero-speed Level of 

Motor 

0~65535 rpm 

0 ○ ○ ○ 


Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters 



Factory 

Setting 


�03-00 

Analog Input 1 (AVI) 0: No function 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-01 

Analog Input 2 (ACI) 1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control 

mode) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-02 

Analog Input 3 (AUI) 2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode) 0 ○ 

3: Torque compensation command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-03 

�03-04 

�03-05 

�03-06 

�03-07 

�03-08 

�03-09 

�03-10 

�03-11 

�03-12 

�03-13 

�03-14 

�03-15 

�03-16 

�03-17 

�03-18 

�03-21 

�03-24 

4: PID target value (refer to group 8) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

5: PID feedback signal (refer to group 8) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

6: P.T.C. thermistor input value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

7: Positive torque limit ○ 

8: Negative torque limit ○ 

9: Regenerative torque limit ○ 

10: Positive/negative torque limit ○ 

11: PID feedback signal of tension ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

12: Line speed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

13: Reel diameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

14: PID target value of tension (tension closed-loop) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

15: Tension setting (tension open-loop) ○ 

16: Zero-speed tension ○ 

17: Tension taper ○ 

Analog Input Bias 1 

(AVI) 

-100.0~100.0% 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


(ACI) 

-100.0~100.0% 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


(AUI) 

-100.0~100.0% 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Positive/negative Bias 0: Zero bias 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Mode (AVI) 

1: Lower than bias=bias 

Positive/negative Bias 2: Greater than bias=bias 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Mode (ACI) 

3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving 

Positive/negative Bias as the center 

Mode (AUI) 

4: Serve bias as the center 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Analog Input Gain 1 

(AVI) 

-500.0~500.0% 

100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


(ACI ) 

-500.0~500.0% 

100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


(AUI) 

-500.0~500.0% 

100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

ACI/AVI2 Selection 0: ACI 

1: AVI 2 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Analog Input Delay 

Time (AVI) 

0.00~2.00 sec 

0.01 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Time (ACI) 

0.00~2.00 sec 

0.01 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Time (AUI) 

0.00~2.00 sec 

0.01 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Addition Function of 0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

the Analog Input 1: Enable 

Loss of the ACI Signal 0: Disable 

1: Continue operation at the last frequency 

2: Decelerate to stop 

3: Stop immediately and display E.F. 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Analog Output 1 0: Output frequency (Hz) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

1: Frequency command (Hz) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Analog Output 2 2: Motor speed (Hz) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

3: Output current (rms) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Analog Output 3 4: Output voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

5: DC Bus Voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

6: Power factor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

7: Power ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

8: Output torque ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


9: AVI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

10: ACI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

11: AUI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

12: q-axis current ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

13: q-axis feedback value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

14: d-axis current ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

15: d-axis feedback value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

16: q-axis voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

17: d-axis voltage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

18: Torque command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

19: Pulse frequency command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-19 

Gain for Analog Output 0~200.0% 

1 

100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-20 

Analog Output 1 Value 0: Absolute value in REV direction 

in REV Direction 1: Output 0V in REV direction 

2: Enable output voltage in REV direction 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-22 


2 

100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-23 




0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-25 


3 

100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-26 




0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Group 4 Multi-Step Speed Parameters 



Factory 

Setting 


�04-00 

1st Step Speed 

Frequency 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�04-01 

2nd Step Speed 

Frequency 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�04-02 

3rd Step Speed 

Frequency 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�04-03 

4th Step Speed 

Frequency 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�04-04 

�04-05 

�04-06 

�04-07 

�04-08 

�04-09 

�04-10 

�04-11 

�04-12 

�04-13 

�04-14 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 


Frequency 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00~600.00Hz 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

0.00 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

�04-15 

Multi-position 1 0~65535 0 ○ ○ 

�04-16 


�04-17 


�04-18 


�04-19 


�04-20 


�04-21 


�04-22 


�04-23 


�04-24 


�04-25 


�04-26 


�04-27 


�04-28 


�04-29 




Group 5 Motor Parameters 


Factory 

Setting 


05-00 Motor Auto Tuning 0: No function 

1: Rolling test 


3: Reserved 

0 ○ 

05-01 Full-load Current of 

Motor 1 (A) 

40-120% of drive’s rated current #.## ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�05-02 

Rated power of Motor 1 

(kW) 

0~655.35 #.## ○ ○ ○ 

�05-03 

Rated speed of Motor 1 

(rpm) 

0~65535 

1710 (60Hz, 4 poles), 1410 (50Hz, 4 poles) 

1710 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-04 Number of Motor Poles 1 2~20 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-05 No-load Current of Motor 0-factory setting of Pr.05-01 

1 (A) 

#.## ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-06 Stator Resistance (Rs) of 0~65.535Ω 

Motor 1 

#.### ○ ○ ○ 

05-07 Rotor Resistance (Rr) of 0~65.535Ω 

Motor 1 

#.### ○ ○ ○ 

05-08 Magnetizing Inductance 

(Lm) of Motor 1 

0~6553.5mH #.# ○ ○ ○ 

05-09 Stator inductance (Lx) of 0~6553.5mH 

Motor 1 

#.# ○ ○ ○ 

05-10 Motor 1/Motor 2 1: Motor 1 

1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Selection 

2: Motor 2 

�05-11 

Frequency for Yconnection/ 

Δ−connection Switch 

0.00~600.00Hz 60.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-12 Y-connection 

0: Disable 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

/Δ−connection Switch 1: Enable 


Motor 2 (A) 

40-120% #.## ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�05-14 

Rated Power of Motor 2 0~655.35 

(kW) 

#.## ○ ○ ○ 

�05-15 

Rated Speed of Motor 2 

(rpm) 

0~65535 1710 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-16 Number of Motor Poles 2 2~20 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-17 No-load Current of Motor 0- factory setting of Pr.05-01 

2 (A) 

#.## ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-18 Stator Resistance(Rs) of 0~65.535Ω 

Motor 2 

#.### ○ ○ ○ 

05-19 Rotor Resistance(Rr) of 

Motor 2 

0~65.535Ω #.### ○ ○ ○ 



0~6553.5mH #.# ○ ○ ○ 

05-21 Stator Inductance(Lx) of 0~6553.5mH 

Motor 2 

#.# ○ ○ ○ 

�05-22 

Torque Compensation 

Time Constant 

0.001~10.000sec 0.020 ○ ○ ○ 

�05-23 

Slip Compensation Time 0.001~10.000sec 

Constant 

0.100 ○ ○ 

�05-24 

Torque Compensation 

Gain 

0~10 0 ○ ○ 

�05-25 

Slip Compensation Gain 0.00~10.00 0.00 ○ ○ 

�05-26 

Slip Deviation Level 0~1000% (0: disable) 0 ○ ○ ○ 

�05-27 

Detection Time of Slip 

Deviation 

0.0~10.0 sec 1.0 ○ ○ ○ 

�05-28 

Over Slip Treatment 

0: Warn and keep operation 

1: Warn and ramp to stop 

2: Warn and coast to stop 

0 ○ ○ ○ 

�05-29 

Hunting Gain 0~10000 (0: disable) 2000 ○ ○ ○ 

�05-30 

Delay Time for Y- 0~60.000 sec 

connection/Δ −connection 

0.200 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-31 Accumulative Motor 

Operation Time (Min.) 

00~1439 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-32 Accumulative Motor 

Operation Time (day) 

00~65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Group 6 Protection Parameters 



Factory 

Setting 


�06-00 

Low Voltage Level 160.0~220.0Vdc 

320.0~440.0Vdc 

180.0 

360.0 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

�06-01 

Over-voltage Stall 

Prevention 

0.0: Disable 

350.0~450.0Vdc 380.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

700.0~900.0Vdc 760.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-02 

Phase-loss Protection 0: Warn and keep operation 



0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-03 

Over-current Stall 

Prevention during 

Acceleration 

00~250% (100%: drive’s rated current) 170 ○ ○ ○ 

�06-04 



Operation 


�06-05 

Accel./Decel. Time 

Selection of Stall 

0: by current accel/decel time 

1: by the 1st accel/decel time 

0 ○ ○ ○ 

Prevention at constant 2: by the 2nd accel/decel time 

speed 

3: by the 3rd accel/decel time 

4: by the 4th accel/decel time 

5: by auto accel/decel time 

�06-06 

Over-torque Detection 0: disable 

Selection (OT1) 1: over-torque detection during constant speed 

operation, continue to operate after detection 

2: over-torque detection during constant speed 

operation, stop operation after detection 

3: over-torque detection during operation, continue to 

operate after detection 

4: over-torque detection during operation, stop 

operation after detection 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-07 

Over-torque Detection 10~250%(100%: drive’s rated current) 

Level (OT1) 

150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-08 

Over-torque Detection 0.0~60.0 sec 

Time (OT1) 

0.1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-09 

Over-torque Detection 0: disable 

Selection (OT2) 1: over-torque detection during constant speed 

operation, continue to operate after detection 

2: over-torque detection during constant speed 

operation, stop operation after detection 

3: over-torque detection during operation, continue to 


4: over-torque detection during operation, stop 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-10 


Level (OT2) 

150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-11 

Over-torque Detection 0.0~60.0 sec 

Time (OT2) 

0.1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-12 

Current Limit 0~250%(100%: drive’s rated current) 150 ○ ○ 

�06-13 

Electronic Thermal 0: Inverter motor 

Relay Selection (Motor 1: Standard motor 

2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

1) 

2: Disable 

�06-14 

Electronic Thermal 

Characteristic for 

Motor 1 

30.0~600.0 sec 60.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-15 

Heat Sink Over-heat 

(OH) Warning 

0.0~110.0 °C 85.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-16 

Stall Prevention Limit 

Level 

0~100% (refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04) 50 ○ ○ ○ 

06-17 Present Fault Record 0: No fault 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-18 

Second Most Recent 

Fault Record 

2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 

3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn) 

0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

4: Ground fault (GFF) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-19 

Third Most Recent 

Fault Record 

5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) 

6: Over-curent at stop (ocS) 

0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-20 Fourth Most Recent 8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Fault Record 9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-21 Fifth Most Recent 12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Fault Record 13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

15: Phase loss (PHL) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

16: IGBT over-heat (oH1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-22 Sixth Most Recent 17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Fault Record 18: TH1: IGBT hardware failure (tH1o) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

19: TH2: Heat sink hardware failure(tH2o) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

20: Fan error signal output ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

21: over-load (oL) (when it exceeds 150% rated 

current, 1 min later it will be overload) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

25: Fuse error (FuSE) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

26: over-torque 1 (ot1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

27: over-torque 1 (ot2) 

28: Reserved 

29: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

30: Memory write-in error (cF1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

31: Memory read-out error (cF2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

32: Isum current detection error (cd0) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

33: U-phase current detection error (cd1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

34: V-phase current detection error (cd2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

35: W-phase current detection error (cd3) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

37: Over-current detection error (Hd1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

39: Ground current detection error (Hd3) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

40: Auto tuning error (AuE) ○ ○ ○ 

41: PID feedback loss (AFE) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

42: PG feedback error (PGF1) ○ ○ ○ 

43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) ○ ○ ○ 

44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) ○ ○ 

45: PG slip error (PGF4) ○ ○ 

46: PG ref input error (PGr1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

47: PG ref loss (PGr2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

48: Analog current input loss (ACE) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

49: External fault input (EF) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


51: External Base Block (B.B.) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

52: Password error (PcodE) 

53: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

54: Communication error (cE1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




58: Communication Time-out (cE10) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

59: PU time-out (cP10) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

60: Brake transistor error (bF) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch error (ydc) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

63: Slip error (oSL) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

64: Broken belt error (bEb) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

65: Error PID feedback signal of tension (tdEv) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-23 

Fault Output Option 1 0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-24 


�06-25 


�06-26 


�06-27 

Electronic Thermal 0: Inverter motor 

Relay Selection (Motor 1: Standard motor 

2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


2) 2: Disable 

�06-28 

Electronic Thermal 

Characteristic for 

Motor 2 

30.0~600.0 sec 60.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-29 

PTC (Positive 

Temperature 



0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Coefficient) Detection 

Selection 


�06-30 

PTC Level 0.0~100.0% 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-31 

Filter Time for PTC 

Detection 

0.00~10.00sec 0.20 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-32 

Output Frequency for 

Malfunction 

0.00~655.35 Hz Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-33 

Output Voltage for 

Malfunction 

0.0~6553.5 V Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-34 

DC Voltage for 

Malfunction 


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-35 

Output Current for 

Malfunction 

0.00~655.35 Amp Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-36 

IGBT Temperature for 0.0~6553.5 °C 

Malfunction 

Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



Group 7 Special Parameters 


Factory 

Setting 


�07-00 

Software Brake Level 230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc 

460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc 

380.0 

760.0 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-01 

DC Brake Current 

Level 

0~100% 0 ○ ○ 

�07-02 

DC Brake Time at 

Start-up 

0.0~60.0 sec 0.0 ○ ○ 

�07-03 

DC Brake Time at 

Stop 

0.0~60.0 sec 0.0 ○ ○ 

�07-04 

Start-point for DC 

Brake 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ 

�07-05 

Proportional Gain for 

DC Brake 

1~500 50 ○ ○ ○ 

�07-06 

Momentary Power 

Loss Operation 

0: Operation stop after momentary power loss 

1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Selection 

speed search starts with the Master Frequency 

reference value 

2: Operation continues after momentary power loss, 

speed search starts with the minimum frequency 

�07-07 

Maximum Allowable 

Power Loss Time 

0.1~5.0 sec 2.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-08 

B.B. Time for Speed 

Search 

0.1~5.0 sec 0.5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-09 

Current Limit for 

Speed Search 

20~200% 150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-10 

Base-block Speed 

Search 

0: Stop operation 

1: Speed search starts with last frequency command 

2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-11 

Auto Restart after 

Fault 

0~10 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-12 

Speed Search during 

Start-up 

0: Disable 

1: Speed search from maximum frequency 

2: Speed search from start-up frequency 

3: Speed search from minimum frequency 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-13 

Decel. Time Selection 0: Disable 

for Momentary Power 1: 1 

Loss 

st decel. time 

2: 2 nd decel. time 

3: 3 rd decel. time 

4: 4 th 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

decel. time 

5: Current decel. time 

6: Auto decel. Time 

�07-14 

DEB Return Time 0.0~25.0 sec 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-15 

Dwell Time at Accel. 0.00~600.00sec 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-16 

Dwell Frequency at 

Accel. 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-17 

Dwell Time at Decel. 0.00~600.00sec 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-18 

Dwell Frequency at 

Decel. 

0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-19 

Fan Control 0: Fan always ON 

1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF 

2: AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive 

stops and fan OFF 

3: Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink 

temperature(around 60 o C) attained 

4: Fan always OFF 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�07-20 

Torque Command -100.0~100.0% (Pr. 07-22 setting=100%) 0.0 ○ 

�07-21 

Torque Command 

Source 

0: Digital keypad 

1: RS485 serial communication (RJ-11) 

2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00) 

0 ○ 

�07-22 

Maximum Torque 

Command 

0~500% 100 ○ 

�07-23 

Filter Time of Torque 

Command 

0.000~1.000 sec 0.000 ○ 

07-24 Speed Limit Selection 0: By Pr.07-25 and Pr.07-26 

1: Frequency command source (Pr.00-20) 

0 ○ 

�07-25 

Torque Mode +Speed 

Limit 

0~120% 10 ○ 

�07-26 

Torque Mode-Speed 

Limit 

0~120% 10 ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


07-27 

Source of Torque 

Offset 

0: Disable 

1: Analog input (Pr.03-00) 

2: Torque offset setting 

3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-29 to Pr.07- 

31) 

0 ○ ○ ○ 

�07-28 

Torque Offset Setting 0.0~100.0% 0.0 ○ ○ ○ 

�07-29 

High Torque Offset 0.0~100.0% 30.0 ○ ○ ○ 

�07-30 

Middle Torque Offset 0.0~100.0% 20.0 ○ ○ ○ 

�07-31 

Low Torque Offset 0.0~100.0% 10.0 ○ ○ ○ 

�07-32 

Forward Motor Torque 0~500% 

Limit 

200 ○ ○ 

�07-33 

Forward Regenerative 0~500% 

Torque Limit 

200 ○ ○ 

�07-34 

Reverse Motor Torque 0~500% 

Limit 

200 ○ ○ 

�07-35 

Reverse Regenerative 0~500% 

Torque Limit 

200 ○ ○ 

07-36 

Emergency Stop (EF) 

& Forced Stop 

0: Coast stop 

1: By deceleration Time 1 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Selection 




5: System Deceleration 

6: Automatic Deceleration 



Group 8 High-function PID Parameters 


08-00 

Input Terminal for PID 

Feedback 


1: Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI 

(Pr.03-00) 

2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip 

direction) 

3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15) 

4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 

(Pr.03-00) 

5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip 

direction) 

6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15) 

Factory 

Setting 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-01 Proportional Gain (P) 0.0~500.0% 80.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-02 Integral Gain (I) 0.00~100.00 sec 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-03 Derivative Control (D) 0.00~1.00 sec 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Upper limit for Integral 

�08-04 Control 

0.0~100.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

PID Output Frequency 

�08-05 Limit 

0.0~110.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-06 PID Offset -100.0~+100.0% 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-07 PID Delay Time 0.0~2.5 sec 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Feedback Signal Detection 

�08-08 0.0~3600.0 sec 

Time 

0: Warn and keep operating 

0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-09 


Feedback Fault Treatment 


3: Warn and keep at last frequency 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-10 Sleep Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-11 Wake-up Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-12 Sleep Time 0.0~6000.0 sec 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-13 PID Deviation Level 1.0~50.0% 10.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-14 PID Deviation Time 0.1~300.0 sec 5.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Filter Time for PID 

�08-15 Feedback 

08-16 

0.1~300.0 sec 5.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

| 

08-20 

Reserved 

08-21 

Tension Control Selection 0: Disable 

1: Tension closed-loop, speed mode 

0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

2: Line speed closed-loop, speed mode 

3: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

4: Tension open-loop, torque mode ○ 

08-22 

Wind Mode 0: Rewind 

1: Unwind 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-23 

Mechanical Gear A at Reel 1-65535 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-24 

Mechanical Gear B at 

Motor 

1-65535 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-25 

Source of the Tension 

Command/Line Speed 

0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-26) 

1: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-26) 

2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02=14 PID target value of 

tension, 03-00~03-02=12 line speed) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

PID Target Value of 

�08-26 

Tension/Line Speed 

0.0~100.0% 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-27 

Source of Tension/Line 

Speed PID Feedback 

0: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID 

feedback of tension) 

1: Pulse input (Pr.08-40) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-28 

Auto-tuning Tension PID 0: Disable 

1: Reel diameter (08-29~08-30 corresponds to 08-44, 

08-32~08-33 corresponds to 08-43) 

2: Frequency (08-29~08-30 corresponds to 01-07, 08- 

32~08-33 corresponds to 01-00) 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

Proportional Gain 1 of 

�08-29 

Tension PID P 

0.0~1000.0 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Integral Time of Tension 

�08-30 

PID I 

0.00~500.00 sec 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 



Proportional Gain 2 of 

�08-32 

Tension PID P 

0.0~1000.0 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Integral Time 2 of Tension 

�08-33 

PID I 

0.00~500.00 sec 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


08-35 

PID/Line Speed Output 

Status 

0: Positive output 

1: Negative output 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-36 

Tension/Line Speed PID 

Output Limit 

0~100.00% 20.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-37 

Source of Line Speed 

Input Command 

0: Disable 

1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed) 



4: DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-38 

Max. Line Speed 0.0~3000.0m/min 1000.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-39 

Min. Line Speed 0.0~3000.0m/min 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-40 

Pulse Number for Each 

Meter 

0.0~6000.0 pulse/m 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-41 

Current Line Speed 0.0~3000.0m/min 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-42 

Source of Reel Diameter 0: Calculated by line speed 

1: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on 

reel shaft)(Pr.08-49~51, Pr.10-15) 

2: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on 

motor)(Pr.08-23~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 10-00~10-01) 

3: Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to 

13) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-43 

Max. Reel Diameter 1.0~6000.0mm 6000.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-44 

Empty Reel Diameter 1.0~6000.0mm 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-45 

Source of Initial Reel 

Diameter 


1: Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-46 

Initial Reel Diameter 0.0~6000.0mm 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-47 

Initial Reel Diameter 1 0.0~6000.0mm 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-48 


08-49 

Number of Pulse per 

Revolution 

1~10000ppr 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-50 

Coil Number for Each 

Layer 

0.001~60.000mm 1.000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-51 

Material Thickness 0.001~60.000mm 1.000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Filter Time of Reel 

�08-52 

Diameter 

0.00 to 100.00 seconds 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-53 

Auto Compensation of 

Reel Diameter 

0: Disable 

1: Enable 

1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Current Reel Diameter 

�08-54 

1.0~6000.0mm 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-55 

Smart Start Function 0: Disable 

1: Enable 

2: In unwind mode, rewind in reverse direction 

1 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-56 

Switch Level for Smart 

Start and PID function 

0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26) 15.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-57 

Frequency for Smart Start 0.00~600.00Hz 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Accel. Time for Smart Start 0.01~600.00 seconds 

�08-58 

3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-59 

Broken Belt Detection 0: Disable 

1: Enable 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-60 

Min. Line Speed of Broken 0.0~3000.0m/min 

Belt Detection 

0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-61 

Allowance Difference of 

Reel Diameter of Broken 


1.0~6000.0mm 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-62 

Detection Time of Broken 

Belt 

0.00~100.00 sec 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-63 

Allowance Error Level of 


Feedback 

0~100% 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-64 

Allowance Error Detection 0.0~10.0 sec 

Time of Tension/Line 

Speed PID Feedback 

0.5 ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


08-65 

Error Treatment of 




0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Feedback 


08-66 

Upper Limit of Tension PID 0.0~100.0% 

Feedback 

100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-67 

Lower Limit of Tension PID 0.0~100.0% 

Feedback 

0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


08-69 

DFM Selection 0: Output frequency 

1: Frequency command 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-70 

08-71 

Low-pass Filter Time of 

Line Speed 

0.00~100.00 sec 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

| 

08-75 

Reserved 

08-76 

Source of Tension Setting 0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-78) 

1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15 tension 

setting) (Pr.08-78) 

0 ○ 

08-77 

Max. Tension 0~30000 N 0 ○ 

08-78 

Tension Setting 0~30000 N 0 ○ 

08-79 

Source of Zero-speed 

Tension Setting 

0: Disable 

1: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-80) 

2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zerospeed 

tension) (Pr.08-80) 

0 ○ 

0~30000 N 0 ○ 

08-80 

Setting of Zero-speed 

Tension 

08-81 

Source of Tension Taper 0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-82) 

1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17 tension 

taper)(Pr.08-82) 

0 ○ 

08-82 

Tension Taper 0~100% 0 ○ 

08-83 

Friction Compensation 0.0~100.0% 0.0 ○ 

08-84 

Compensation Coefficient 

of Material Inertial 

0~30000 0 ○ 

08-85 

Torque Feedforward Gain 0.0~100.0% 50.0 ○ 

08-86 

08-87 

Low Pass Filter Time of 

Torque Feedforward 

0.00~100.00 5.00 ○ 

| 

08-99 

Reserved 


Group 9 Communication Parameters 



Factory 

Setting 


�09-00 Communication 

Address 

1~254 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-01 

COM1 Transmission 

Speed 

4.8~115.2Kbps 9.6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-02 


Fault Treatment 




3: No warning and keep operation 

3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-03 

COM1 Time-out 

Detection 

0.0~100.0 sec 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-04 

COM1 Communication 0: 7N1 (ASCII) 

Protocol 

1: 7N2 (ASCII) 

2: 7E1 (ASCII) 

3: 7O1 (ASCII) 







10: 8E2 (ASCII) 

11: 8O2 (ASCII) 

12: 8N1 (RTU) 

13: 8N2 (RTU) 

14: 8E1 (RTU) 

15: 8O1 (RTU) 

16: 8E2 (RTU) 

17: 8O2 (RTU) 

1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-05 


Speed (Keypad) 

4.8~115.2Kbps 9.6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-06 





3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

(Keypad) 


3: No warning and keep operation 

�09-07 

COM2 Time-out 

Detection (Keypad) 

0.0~100.0 sec 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-08 

COM2 Communication 0: 7N1 (ASCII) 

Protocol (Keypad) 1: 7N2 (ASCII) 









10: 8E2 (ASCII) 

11: 8O2 (ASCII) 

12: 8N1 (RTU) 

13: 8N2 (RTU) 

14: 8E1 (RTU) 

15: 8O1 (RTU) 

16: 8E2 (RTU) 

17: 8O2 (RTU) 

13 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-09 Response Delay Time 0.0~200.0ms 2.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-10 

Transmission Master 

Frequency 

0.00~600.00Hz 60.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-11 

Block Transfer 1 0~65535 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-12 


�09-13 


�09-14 


�09-15 


�09-16 


�09-17 


�09-18 


�09-19 





Factory 

Setting 


�09-20 


09-21 


Status 

0~65535 Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

09-22 

Display Digital Value 

of Analog Output 2 


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

09-23 




○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters 



Factory 

Setting 


10-00 Encoder Pulse 1~20000 600 ○ ○ ○ 

10-01 Encoder Input Type 0: Disable 

0 ○ ○ ○ 

Setting 

1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase 

B leads in a reverse run command 

2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase 

A leads in a reverse run command 



direction) 



direction) 

5: Single-phase input 

�10-02 

Encoder Feedback 





2 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-03 

Detection Time for 


Fault 

0.00~10.0 sec 1.0 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-04 

ASR (Auto Speed 

Regulation) Control 

( P) 1 

0~40 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-05 

ASR (Auto Speed 0.000~10.000 sec 

Regulation) Control (I) 

1 

0.100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-06 



( P) 2 

0~40 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-07 



2 

0.100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-08 

ASR 1/ASR2 Switch 

Frequency 

5.00~600.00Hz 7.00 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-09 

Low Pass Filter Time 

of ASR Output 

0.000~0.350 sec 0.008 ○ ○ 

�10-10 

Encoder Stall Level 0~120% (0: disable) 115 ○ ○ 

�10-11 

�10-12 

�10-13 

�10-14 

�10-15 

�10-16 

Encoder Stall 

Detection Time 

0.0~2.0 sec 0.1 ○ ○ 

Encoder Slip Range 0~50% (0: disable) 50 ○ ○ 

Encoder Slip Detection 

Time 

Encoder Stall and Slip 

Error Treatment 

Pulse Input Type 

Setting 

Output Setting for 

Frequency Division 

(denominator) 

0.0~10.0 sec 0.5 ○ ○ 




2 ○ ○ 

0: Disable 

1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase 

B leads in a reverse run command 

2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase 

A leads in a reverse run command 



direction) 



direction) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

1~255 1 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-17 

Electrical Gear A (PG 

1 of PG card) 

1~5000 100 ○ ○ 

�10-18 

Electrical Gear B (PG2 1~5000 

of PG card) 

100 ○ ○ 

�10-19 

Positioning for 

Encoder Position 

0~65535 pulses 0 ○ ○ 

�10-20 

Range for Encoder 

Position Attained 

0~20000 pulses 10 ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


�10-21 P Gain of Zero Speed 0~40 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-22 I Gain of Zero Speed 0.000~10.000 sec 0.100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-23 

Feed Forward Gain of 

APR 

0~100 30 ○ ○ 

�10-24 

Deceleration Time for 

Internal 

Position/Waiting Time 

for Switching Max. 

Frequency 

�10-25 

Max. Frequency for 

Resolution Switch 


�10-27 

Mechanical Gear at 

Load A1 

�10-28 


Motor B1 

�10-29 


Load A2 

�10-30 


Motor B2 

Group 11 Advanced Parameters 

0.00~600.00 sec/00~6000.0 sec 3.00 

3.0 

○ ○ 

0.00~600.00Hz 50.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

1~65535 100 ○ ○ ○ 

1~65535 100 ○ ○ ○ 

1~65535 100 ○ ○ ○ 

1~65535 100 ○ ○ ○ 


Factory 

Setting 



0 ○ ○ 

11-00 System Control 




�11-01 

Per Unit of System 

Inertia 

1~65535 (256=1PU) 400 ○ ○ 

�11-02 Low-speed Bandwidth 0~40Hz 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�11-03 High-speed Bandwidth 0~40Hz 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�11-04 PDFF Gain Value 0~200% 30 ○ 

Gain Value of Flux 0~200% 90 ○ ○ 

�11-05 Weakening Curve for 

Motor 1 

Gain Value of Flux 0~200% 90 ○ ○ 

�11-06 Weakening Curve for 

Motor 2 

�11-07 


Phase-loss 

0.01~600.00 sec 0.20 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


�11-09 Level of Phase-loss 0.0~320.0 60.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�11-10 

Speed Feed Forward 

Gain 

0~100% 0 ○ 

�11-11 Zero-speed Bandwidth 0~40Hz 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�11-12 

Speed Response of 

Flux Weakening Area 

0: Disable 

0~150% 

65 ○ 

�11-13 Notch Filter Depth 0~20db 0 ○ 

�11-14 Notch Filter Frequency 0.00~200.00 0.00 ○ 

�11-15 

Gain Value of Slip 

Compensation 

0.00~1.00 1.00 ○ 

�11-16 

Low-pass Filter Time 

of Keypad Display 

0.001~65.535sec 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�11-17 


of PG2 Pulse Input 

0.000~65.535sec 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�11-18 APR Gain 0.00~40.00 10.00 ○ 

�11-19 

11-20 

APR Curve Time 0.00~655.35 sec 3.00 ○ 

| 

11-28 

Reserved 

11-29 

Accumulative 

Operation Time of 

Phase-loss 

0~65535 (hour) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



11-30 

| 

11-40 

Reserved 


Factory 

Setting 




4.2 Version Differences 

4.2.1 Version 2.02 

New or update parameter groups are: 






Version 2.02 


New settings are marked in bold. In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.02-00 to Pr.02-34. 


Factory 


Setting 

02-01 Multi-Function Input Command 1 (MI1) 

(it is Stop terminal for 3-wire operation) 

27: ASR1/ASR2 selection 

○ ○ 

02-02 Multi-Function Input Command 2 (MI2) 28: Emergency stop (EF1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-03 Multi-Function Input Command 3 (MI3) 29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-04 Multi-Function Input Command 4 (MI4) 30: Signal confirmation for Δ−connection ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-05 Multi-Function Input Command 5 (MI5) 31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


(specific terminal for TRG) 

32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-23 

02-24 

Multi-Function Input Command 7 

Multi-Function Input Command 8 

33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31) 

34: Enable multi-step position control 

○ ○ 

○ 

○ ○ 

○ 

○ 

02-25 Multi-Function Input Command 9 35: Enable position control ○ ○ 

02-26 Multi-Function Input Command 10 36: Enable position learning function 

(valid at stop) 

○ ○ 

02-27 Multi-Function Input Command 11 37: Enable pulse position input 

command 

○ ○ 

02-28 Multi-Function Input Command 12 38: Disable write EEPROM function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-29 Multi-Function Input Command 13 39: Torque command direction ○ 

02-30 Multi-Function Input Command 14 40: Force stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




�02-11 

Multi-function Output 1 RA, RB, 

RC(Relay1) 


�02-12 


MRA, MRC (Relay2) 

30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-13 

Multi-function Output 3 (MO1) 31: Y-connection for the motor coil ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-14 

Multi-function Output 4 (MO2) 32: Δ connection for the motor coil ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-35 

Multi-function Output 5 (MO3) 33: Zero speed (actual output 

frequency) 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-36 

Multi-function Output 6 (MO4) 34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output 

frequency) 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-37 

Multi-function Output 7 (MO5) 35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-38 


�02-39 


�02-40 


�02-41 

Multi-function Output 11 (MO9) 39: Position attained (Pr.10-19) ○ 

�02-42 

Multi-function Output 12 (MOA) 40: Speed attained (including zero 

speed) 

○ ○ ○ ○ 






In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.03-00 to Pr.03-20. The settings for Pr.03-00 to 

Pr.03-02 are from 0 to 10 


Factory 


Setting 

�03-00 

Analog Input 1 (AVI) 2: torque command (torque limit under 

speed mode) 

0 ○ 


�03-01 

Analog Input 2 (ACI) 4: PID target value (refer to group 8) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

5: PID feedback signal (refer to group 

8) 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-02 

Analog Input 3 (AUI) 6: P.T.C. thermistor input value ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 





�03-20 

Analog Output Value in REV Direction 0: Absolute value in REV direction 

1: Output 0V in REV direction 

2: Enable output voltage in REV 

direction 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.06-00 to Pr.06-31. The settings of Pr.06-01 are 

shown as follows. The settings for Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22 are from 0 to 62. 


Factory 


Setting 

�06-01 

Over-voltage Stall Prevention 

0.0: Disable 

350.0~450.0Vdc 380.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

700.0~900.0Vdc 760.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-17 Present Fault Record 0: No fault 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-18 

06-19 

06-20 

Second Most Recent Fault Record 

Third Most Recent Fault Record 

Fourth Most Recent Fault Record 

1: Over-current during acceleration 

(ocA) 

2: Over-current during deceleration 

(ocd) 

0 

0 

0 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

06-21 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record 3: Over-current during constant speed 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-22 Sixth Most Recent Fault Record (ocn) 

4: Ground fault (GFF) 



7: Over-voltage during acceleration 

(ovA) 

8: Over-voltage during deceleration 

(ovd) 

9: Over-voltage during constant speed 

(ovn) 

10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) 

11: Low-voltage during acceleration 

(LvA) 

12: Low-voltage during deceleration 

(Lvd) 

13: Low-voltage during constant speed 

(Lvn) 

14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS) 

15: Phase loss (PHL) 

16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP 

above) 

18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o) 

19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o) 

20: Fan error signal output 

21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min) 

22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1) 

23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2) 

24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) 

25: Fuse error (FuSE) 



28: Insufficient torque 1 

29: Insufficient torque 2 

30: Memory write-in error (cF1) 

31: Memory read-out error (cF2) 

32: Isum current detection error (cd0) 

33: U-phase current detection error 

(cd1) 

34: V-phase current detection error 

(cd2) 

35: W-phase current detection error 

(cd3) 

36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0) 

37: Over-current detection error (Hd1) 

38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2) 

39: Ground current detection error (Hd3) 

40: Auto tuning error (AuE) 

41: PID feedback loss (AFE) 

42: PG feedback error (PGF1) 

43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) 

44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) 

45: PG slip error (PGF4) 

46: PG ref input error (PGr1) 

47: PG ref loss (PGr2) 

48: Analog current input loss (ACE) 

49: External fault input (EF) 

50: Emergency stop (EF1) 

51: External Base Block (B.B.) 


53: Software error (ccodE) 

54: Communication error (cE1) 




58: Communication Time-out (cE10) 

59: PU time-out (cP10) 

60: Brake transistor error (bF) 

61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch 

error (ydc) 

62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb) 

Factory 


Setting 

�06-31 

Filter Time for PTC Detection 0.00~10.00sec 0.20 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.08-00 to Pr.08-15. 


Factory 


Setting 

�08-15 

Filter Time for PID Feedback 0.1~300.0 sec 5.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 


Setting 

�10-28 PG Mechanical Gear B1 1~5000 100 ○ ○ ○ 






Factory 


Setting 

11-09 Level of Phase-loss 0.0~320.0 60.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

11-10 

11-18 

Reserved 

| 

11-28 

Reserved 

11-29 

Accumulative Operation Time of Phaseloss 

0~65535 (hour) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

11-30 APR Curve Time 0.00~655.35 sec 3.00 ○ 

4.2.2 Version 2.04 









Version 2.04 



Factory 


Setting 

0: Display the frequency command value (LED F) 

1: Display the actual output frequency (LED H) 

00-03 Start-up Display Selection 

2: Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U) 

3: Display the output current (A) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




3: Display DC-BUS voltage ( 


00-04 Display 

u ) 




7: Display actual motor speed (HU) 

8: Display estimate output torque (kg-m) 

9: Display PG position (G) (refer to Pr.10-00 and Pr.10- 

01) 

10: Display PID feedback 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

11: Display AVI (%) 

12: Display ACI (%) 

13: Display AUI (%) 

14: Display the temperature of heat sink (°C) 

15: Display the temperature of IGBT (°C) 

16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) 

17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF) 

18: Multi-step speed 

19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input 


21: Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG 

card) 

22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) 

23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) 


New settings 44~50 for Pr.02-00~Pr.02-06 and new parameter 02-43. 




Factory 


Setting 

02-00 2-wire/3-wire Operation 0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Control 

1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout) 

2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD 

3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout) 

4: 3-wire (momentary push button) 

5: 3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start 

Lockout) 




operation) 


command 1 


command 2 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

02-02 




command 4 

○ ○ ○ ○ 



○ ○ ○ ○ 




Command 5 (MI5) 10: EF input (07-36) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

02-06 Multi-Function Input 11: B.B. input 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



TRG) 


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Command 7 



Command 8 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 9 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 10 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 11 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 12 

18: Emergency Stop (07-36) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 13 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 14 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 




command 6) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



26: TQC+PG/FOC+PG model selection ○ ○ 










36: Enable position learning function (valid at stop) ○ ○ 




40: Force stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




44: Reset initial reel diameter ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 


Setting 



47: Reset PID control integration of tension ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

48: Mechanical gear ratio switch 

49: Reserved 

50: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ 

�02-11 





11 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

�02-12 


MRA, MRC (Relay2) 

2: Operation speed attained 

3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19) 

1 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-13 

(MO1) 

5: Zero speed (frequency command) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 




�02-14 


(MO2) 



0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-35 

Multi-function Output 5 12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31) 

(MO3) 13: Overheat 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

14: Software brake signal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-36 

Multi-function Output 6 15: PID feedback error 

(MO4) 16: Slip error (oSL) 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-37 

Multi-function Output 7 18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17) 

(MO5) 19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-38 

Multi-function Output 8 21: Over voltage warning 

(MO6) 22: Over-current stall prevention warning 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-39 

Multi-function Output 9 24: Operation mode indication 

(MO7) 25: Forward command 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-40 


10 (MO8) 



○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-41 


11 (MO9) 



○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-42 


12 (MOA) 



○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 









43: Motor zero-speed output (Pr.02-43) ○ ○ ○ ○ 





48: Error PID feedback of tension 

49: Reserved 

50: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




�02-43 

Zero-speed Level of 

Motor 

0~65535 rpm 


New settings 11~16 for Pr.03-00~Pr.03-02 and new parameters 03-21~03-26. 

Factory 


Setting 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Factory 


Setting 

�03-00 

Analog Input 1 (AVI) 0: No function 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-01 

Analog Input 2 (ACI) 1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR 

control mode) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-02 

Analog Input 3 (AUI) 2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode) 0 ○ 










12: Line speed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


14: PID target value of tension (tension closedloop) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




�03-18 

Analog Output Selection 0: Output frequency (Hz) 

1: Frequency command (Hz) 

0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

�03-21 

Analog Output 

Selection 2 

2: Motor speed (Hz) 

3: Output current (rms) 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

�03-24 

Analog Output 

Selection 3 

4: Output voltage 

5: DC Bus Voltage 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


7: Power ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


9: AVI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

10: ACI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

11: AUI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 









�03-22 

Analog Output Gain 2 0~200.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-23 

Analog Output Value in 0: Absolute value in REV direction 

REV Direction 2 1: Output 0V in REV direction 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-25 

Analog Output Gain 3 0~200.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-26 

Analog Output Value in 0: Absolute value in REV direction 

REV Direction 3 1: Output 0V in REV direction 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 





Factory 

Setting 


05-00 Motor Auto Tuning 0: No function 

1: Rolling test 


3: Reserved 

0 ○ ○ ○ 


Motor 1 

40-100% #.## ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�05-02 

Rated power of Motor 1 0~655.35 #.## ○ ○ ○ 

�05-03 

Rated speed of Motor 1 0~65535 

(rpm) 

1710 (60Hz, 4 poles), 1410 (50Hz, 4 poles) 

1710 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


New setting 0 for Pr.06-01, new settings 64~65 for Pr.06-17~Pr.06-22 and new parameters 06- 

32~06-36. 

Factory 


Setting 

0.0: Disable 

350.0~450.0Vdc 380.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


�06-01 


Prevention 

700.0~900.0Vdc 760.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



06-18 


Fault Record 



0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


06-19 

Third Most Recent Fault 5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) 

Record 6: Over-curent at stop (ocS) 

0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 






06-21 Fifth Most Recent Fault 12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Record 13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


15: Phase loss (PHL) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-22 Sixth Most Recent Fault 17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Record 18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



26: over-torque 1 (ot1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

27: over-torque 1 (ot2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

28: Reserved ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

29: Reserved ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 
















Factory 


Setting 






47: PG ref loss (PGr2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 





52: Password error (PcodE) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

53: Reserved ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 






59: PU time-out (cP10) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 







06-32 

Output Frequency for 

Malfunction 

0.00~655.35 Hz 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-33 

Output AC Voltage for 

Malfunction 

0.0~6553.5 V 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-34 


Malfunction 

0.0~6553.5 V 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-35 

Current Value for 

Malfunction 

0.00~655.35 Amp 0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-36 

IGBT Temperature for 

Malfunction 

0.0~6553.5 °C 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


New parameters 08-21~08-99 


�08-00 

�08-01 

08-21 

08-22 

08-23 


Feedback 

Proportional Gain (P) 0.0~500.0% 

Tension Control 

Selection 



(Pr.03-00) 

2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, 

skip direction) 



(Pr.03-00) 

5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, 

skip direction) 


0: Disable 


1: Unwind 

Mechanical Gear Ratio 1-65535 

A 

1: Closed-loop, speed mode 

2: Line speed, speed mode 

3: Reserved 

4: Open-loop, torque mode 

Factory 

Setting 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

80.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

○ ○ ○ ○ 


○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○



Factory 


Setting 

08-24 

Mechanical Gear Ratio 

B 

1-65535 

100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-25 

Source of the Tension 

Command/Line Speed 

0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-26) 


2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 14 PID 

target value of tension, 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 

line speed) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-26 

PID Target Value of 


0.0~100.0% 

50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-27 

Source of Tension/Line 0: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID 

Speed PID Feedback feedback of tension) 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-28 

Auto-tuning Tension 

PID 

0: Disable 

1: Reel diameter (08-29~08-31corresponds to 08- 

44, 08-32~08-34 corresponds to 08-43) 

2: Frequency (08-29~08-31 corresponds to 01-07, 

08-32~08-34 corresponds to 01-00) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-29 

Tension PID P1 0.0~1000.0 

50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-30 

Tension PID I1 0.00~500.00 sec 

1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-31 

Reserved 

�08-32 

Tension PID P2 0.0~1000.0 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-33 

Tension PID I2 0.00~500.00 sec 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


�08-35 

PID/Line Speed Output 

Status 

0: Positive output 

1: Negative output 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-36 

Tension/Line Speed PID 0~100.00% (according to Pr,01-00) 

Output Limit 

20.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-37 

Source of Line Speed 

Input Command 

0: Disable 

1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line 

speed) 



4: DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-38 

Max. Line Speed 0.0~3000.0m/min 1000.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-39 

Min. Line Speed 0.0~3000.0m/min 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-40 

Pulse Number for Each 0.0~6000.0 

Meter 

0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-41 

Current Line Speed 0.0~3000.0m/min 

0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-42 

Source of Reel 

Diameter 

0: Calculated by line speed 

1: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder 

is on reel shaft)(Pr.08-49~51, Pr.10-15) 

2: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder 

is on motor)(Pr.08-23~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 10- 

00~10-01) 

3: Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is 

set to 13) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-43 

Max. Reel Diameter 1.0~6000.0mm 6000.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-44 

Empty Reel Diameter 1.0~6000.0mm 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-45 

Source of Initial Reel 

Diameter 


1: Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-46 


08-47 


08-48 


08-49 

Number of Pulse per 

Revolution 

1~10000ppr 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-50 

Coil Number for Each 

Layer 

0.001~60.000mm 1.000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-51 

Material Thickness 0.001~60.000mm 1.000 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-52 

Filter Time of Reel 

Diameter 

0.00 to 100.00 seconds 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-53 

Auto Compensation of 

Reel Diameter 

0: Disable 

1: Enable 

1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-54 

Current Reel Diameter 1.0~6000.0mm 1.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-55 

Smart Start 0: Disable 

1: Enable 

1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 





Factory 


Setting 

08-56 

Switch Level for Smart 

Start and PID function 

0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26) 15.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-57 

Frequency for Smart 

Start 

0.00~600.00Hz 2.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-58 

Accel. Time for Smart 

Start 

0.01~600.00 seconds 3.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-59 

Broken Belt Detection 0: Disable 

1: Enable 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-60 

Min. Line Speed of 

Broken Belt Detection 

0.0~3000.0m/min 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-61 

Allowance Error of Line 1.0~6000.0mm 

Speed of Broken Belt 

Detection 

100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-62 

Detection Time of 

Broken Belt 

0.00~100.00 sec 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-63 

Allowance Error Level 

of Tension/Line Speed 

PID Feedback 

0~100% 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-64 

Allowance Error 


Tension PID Feedback 

0.0~10.0 sec 0.5 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-65 


Tension PID Feedback 




0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-66 

Upper Limit of Tension 

PID Feedback 

0.0~100.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-67 

Lower Limit of Tension 

PID Feedback 

0.0~100.0% 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-68 

Reserved 

08-69 

DFM Selection 0: Output frequency 

1: Frequency command 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-70 

08-71 

Low-pass Filter Time of 0.00~100.00 sec 

Line Speed 

0.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

| 

08-75 

Reserved 

08-76 

Source of Tension 

Setting 


1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15 

tension setting) (Pr.08-78) 

0 ○ 

08-77 

Max. Tension 0~30000 N 0 ○ 

08-78 

Tension Setting 0~30000 N 0 ○ 

08-79 

Source of Zero-speed 

Tension Setting 

0: Disable 


2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zerospeed 

tension) (Pr.08-80) 

0 ○ 

08-80 

Setting of Zero-speed 

Tension 

0~30000 N 0 ○ 

08-81 

Source of Tension 

Taper 


1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17 

tension taper)(Pr.08-82) 

0 ○ 

08-82 

Tension Taper 0~100% 0 ○ 

08-83 

Friction Compensation 0.0~100.0% 0.0 ○ 

08-84 

Compensation 

Coefficient of Material 

Inertial 

0~30000 0 ○ 

08-85 

Torque Feed Forward 

Gain 

0.0~100.0% 50.0 ○ 

08-86 

08-87 

Low Pass Filter Time of 0.00~100.00 

Torque Feed Forward 

5.00 ○ 

| 

08-99 

Reserved 





Factory 


Setting 

�09-21 


Status 


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-22 

AFM2 Status 0~4095 Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�09-23 

AFM3 Status 0~4095 Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


New parameters 10-29~10-30 


Factory 


Setting 

�10-04 

ASR (Auto Speed 0~40 

Regulation) Control ( P) 1 

10 ○ ○ 

�10-06 

ASR (Auto Speed 0~40 

Regulation) Control ( P) 2 

10 ○ ○ 

�10-21 P Gain of Zero Speed 0~40 10 ○ ○ 

�10-29 

PG Mechanical Gear A2 1~5000 100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-30 

PG Mechanical Gear B2 1~5000 100 ○ ○ ○ 


Updated parameters 11-00 and 11-09~11-10 and new parameters 11-18~11-40. 


Factory 

VF 

Setting 

VFP 

G 

SV 

C 

FOCP 

G 

TQCP 

G 

bit 0: ASR Auto tuning 

bit 1: Inertia estimate 

0 ○ 

�11-00 System Control bit 2: Zero Servo 


bit 4: Enable gain adjustment of position loop KP 

�11-07 


Phase-loss 

0.01~600.00 sec 0.20 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


�11-09 Level of Phase-loss 0.0~320.0 60.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

11-10 

Speed Feed Forward 0~100% 

Gain 

0 ○ 

�11-11 Zero-speed 

Bandwidth 

0~40Hz 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�11-12 

Speed Response of 0: Disable 

Flux Weakening Area 0~150% 

65 ○ 

�11-13 Notch Filter Depth 0~20db 0 ○ 

�11-14 

Notch Filter 

Frequency 

0.00~200.00 0.00 ○ 

�11-15 

Gain Value of Slip 

Compensation 

0.00~1.00 1.00 ○ 

�11-16 


of Keypad Display 

0.001~65.535sec 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�11-17 


of PG2 Pulse Input 

0.000~65.535sec 0.100 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�11-18 APR Gain 0.00~40.00 10.00 ○ 

�11-19 

11-20 

APR Curve Time 0.00~655.35 sec 3.00 ○ 

| 

11-28 

Reserved 

Accumulative 

11-29 

11-30 

Operation Time of 

Phase-loss 

0~65535 (hour) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

| 

11-40 

Reserved 



4.2.3 Version 2.05 







Group 7: Special Parameters 




Version 2.05 






�00-04 

�00-12 

�00-13 


Display 

Constant/Variable Torque 

Selection 

Optimal 


Setting 

3: Display DC-BUS voltage ( u ) 




7: Display actual motor speed (r) 

8: Display estimate output torque in N-m (t) 

9: Display PG position (G) 

10: Display PID feedback in % (b) 

11: Display AVI in % (1.) 

12: Display ACI in % (2.) 

13: Display AUI in % (3.) 

14: Display the temperature of heat sink in °C (t.) 

15: Display the temperature of IGBT in °C (T) 

16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) (i) 

17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF) (o) 

18: Multi-step speed (S) 

19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (i.) 


(o.) 

21: Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) 

(Z) 

22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (4) 

23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (4.) 

24: Pulse position control for whole operation (MI=37 

and MI=ON) (P.) 

25: Display the present reel diameter under the 

tension control in mm (d) 

26: Display the present line speed under the tension 

control in m/min (L) 

27: Display the present tension setting under the 

tension control in N (T.) 

0: Constant Torque (150%) 

1: Variable Torque (120%) 

0: Linear accel./decel. 

1: Auto accel., linear decel. 

2: Linear accel., auto decel. 

3: Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. 

time by actual load) 

4: Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 

to 01-21) 

0: Enable forward/reverse 

�00-23 Motor Direction Control 1: Disable reverse 

2: Disable forward 


Factory 


Setting 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 


Setting 




operation) 


command 1 


command 2 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

02-02 




command 4 

○ ○ ○ ○ 



○ ○ ○ ○ 




Command 5 (MI5) 10: EF input (Pr.07-36) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



11: B.B. input 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


TRG) 


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Command 7 



Command 8 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 9 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 10 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 11 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 12 

18: Emergency Stop (Pr.07-36) 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 13 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 


Command 14 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 




command 6) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



26: TQCPG/FOCPG mode selection ○ ○ 










36: Enable multi-step position learning function 


○ ○ 




40: Force stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 








48: Mechanical gear ratio switch ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 


Setting 

49: Enable Drive 

50: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-11 





11 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

Multi-function Output 2 2: Operation speed attained 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�02-12 MRA, MRC (Relay2) 3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


�02-13 

(MO1) 





�02-14 


(MO2) 



0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-35 


(MO3) 

12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31) 

13: Overheat 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-36 


(MO4) 

15: PID feedback error 

16: Slip error (oSL) 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-37 


(MO5) 

18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17) 

19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-38 


(MO6) 

21: Over voltage warning 

22: Over-current stall prevention warning 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-39 


(MO7) 

24: Operation mode indication 

25: Forward command 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-40 


(MO8) 



○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-41 


(MO9) 



○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


�02-42 


(MOA) 



○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 















49: Reserved 

50: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 





Factory 

Setting 


�03-18 

Analog Output 1 0: Output frequency (Hz) 

1: Frequency command (Hz) 

0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

�03-21 

Analog Output 2 2: Motor speed (Hz) 

3: Output current (rms) 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

�03-24 

Analog Output 3 4: Output voltage 

5: DC Bus Voltage 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


7: Power ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


9: AVI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

10: ACI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

11: AUI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 









�03-19 

Gain for Analog 

Output 1 

0~200.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-20 

Analog Output 1 

Value in REV 

0: Absolute value in REV direction 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Direction 


�03-22 


Output 2 

0~200.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-23 


Value in REV 



0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Direction 


�03-25 


Output 3 

0~200.0% 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�03-26 


Value in REV 



0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Direction 




Factory 

Setting 



Motor 1 (A) 

40-120% of drive’s rated current #.## ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�05-02 

Rated power of Motor 1 0~655.35 

(kW) 

#.## ○ ○ ○ 

05-06 Stator Resistance (Rs) 

of Motor 1 

0~65.535Ω #.### ○ ○ ○ 

05-07 Rotor Resistance (Rr) 

of Motor 1 

0~65.535Ω #.### ○ ○ ○ 



0~6553.5mH #.# ○ ○ ○ 

05-09 Stator inductance (Lx) 

of Motor 1 

0~6553.5mH #.# ○ ○ ○ 


Motor 2 (A) 

40-120% #.## ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�05-14 

Rated Power of Motor 2 0~655.35 

(kW) 

#.## ○ ○ ○ 

05-17 No-load Current of 

Motor 2 (A) 

0- factory setting of Pr.05-01 #.## ○ ○ ○ ○ 

05-18 Stator Resistance(Rs) 

of Motor 2 

0~65.535Ω #.### ○ ○ ○ 

05-19 Rotor Resistance(Rr) of 0~65.535Ω 

Motor 2 

#.### ○ ○ ○ 



0~6553.5mH #.# ○ ○ ○ 

05-21 Stator Inductance(Lx) 

of Motor 2 

0~6553.5mH #.# ○ ○ ○ 





Factory 

Setting 


�06-03 



Acceleration 


�06-04 



Operation 


�06-07 


Level (OT1) 

150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-10 


Level (OT2) 

150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�06-12 

Current Limit 0~250%(100%: drive’s rated current) 150 ○ ○ 



06-18 


Fault Record 



0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


06-19 

Third Most Recent 

Fault Record 



0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 






06-21 Fifth Most Recent 12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Fault Record 13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


15: Phase loss (PHL) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


06-22 Sixth Most Recent 17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above) 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Fault Record 18: TH1: IGBT hardware failure (tH1o) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



21: over-load (oL) (when it exceeds 150% rated 

current, 1 min later it will be overload) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 





26: over-torque 1 (ot1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


28: Reserved 

29: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


















47: PG ref loss (PGr2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 







Factory 

Setting 




53: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 






59: PU time-out (cP10) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 







06-32 

Output Frequency for 0.00~655.35 Hz 

Malfunction 

Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-33 

Output Voltage for 

Malfunction 


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-34 


Malfunction 


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-35 

Output Current for 

Malfunction 

0.00~655.35 Amp Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

06-36 

IGBT Temperature for 0.0~6553.5 °C 

Malfunction 

Readonly 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



Factory 

Setting 


�07-05 

Proportional Gain for 1~500 

DC Brake 

50 ○ ○ ○ 

�07-19 

Fan Control 0: Fan always ON 

1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF 

2: AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive 

stops and fan OFF 

3: Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink 

temperature(around 60 o C) attained 

4: Fan always OFF 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

07-27 

Source of Torque 

Offset 

0: Disable 

1: Analog input (Pr.03-00) 

2: Torque offset setting 

3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-29 to Pr.07- 

31) 

0 ○ ○ ○ 

07-36 

Emergency Stop (EF) 

& Forced Stop 

0: Coast stop 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

Selection 




5: System Deceleration 

6: Automatic Deceleration 



08-00 


Feedback 



(Pr.03-00) 

2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip 

direction) 



(Pr.03-00) 

5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip 

direction) 


Factory 

Setting 


0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


08-21 

Tension Control 

Selection 

0: Disable 

1: Tension closed-loop, speed mode 

0 ○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 

○ 


3: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ 


08-22 


1: Unwind 

0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-23 

Mechanical Gear A 

at Reel 

1-65535 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-24 

Mechanical Gear B 

at Motor 

1-65535 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-29 

Proportional Gain 1 

of Tension PID P 

0.0~1000.0 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-30 

Integral Time of 

Tension PID I 

0.00~500.00 sec 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-32 

Proportional Gain 2 

of Tension PID P 

0.0~1000.0 50.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

�08-33 

Integral Time 2 of 

Tension PID I 

0.00~500.00 sec 1.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-36 


PID Output Limit 

0~100.00% 20.00 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-40 

Pulse Number for 

Each Meter 

0.0~6000.0 pulse/m 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-41 

Current Line Speed 0.0~3000.0m/min 0.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-46 


08-47 


08-48 


08-55 

Smart Start Function 0: Disable 

1: Enable 


1 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-61 

Allowance 

Difference of Reel 

Diameter of Broken 


1.0~6000.0mm 100.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-64 

Allowance Error 



PID Feedback 

0.0~10.0 sec 0.5 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

08-65 





0 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

PID Feedback 2: Warn and ramp to stop 



Factory 

Setting 


09-22 




○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

09-23 




○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



�10-02 

�10-03 

�10-04 

�10-05 





Fault 



( P) 1 



Factory 

Setting 





2 ○ ○ ○ 

0.00~10.0 sec 1.0 ○ ○ ○ 

0~40 10 ○ ○ ○ 

0.000~10.000 sec 0.100 ○ ○ ○ 




Factory 

Setting 


�10-06 

1 



( P) 2 

0~40 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-07 



2 

0.100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-08 

ASR 1/ASR2 Switch 

Frequency 

5.00~600.00Hz 7.00 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-09 

Low Pass Filter Time 0.000~0.350 sec 

of ASR Output 

0.008 ○ ○ 

�10-10 

Encoder Stall Level 0~120% (0: disable) 115 ○ ○ 

�10-11 

�10-12 

Encoder Stall 


0.0~2.0 sec 0.1 ○ ○ 

Encoder Slip Range 0~50% (0: disable) 50 ○ ○ 

�10-13 

Encoder Slip 


0.0~10.0 sec 0.5 ○ ○ 

�10-14 

Encoder Stall and Slip 0: Warn and keep operation 

Error Treatment 1: Warn and ramp to stop 


2 ○ ○ 

�10-17 

Electrical Gear A 

(PG1 of PG card) 

1~5000 100 ○ ○ 

�10-18 

Electrical Gear B 

(PG2 of PG card) 

1~5000 100 ○ ○ 

�10-19 

Positioning for 

Encoder Position 

0~65535 pulses 0 ○ ○ 

�10-20 

Range for Encoder 


0~20000 pulses 10 ○ ○ 

�10-21 P Gain of Zero Speed 0~40 10 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-22 I Gain of Zero Speed 0.000~10.000 sec 0.100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-23 

Feed Forward Gain 

of APR 

0~100 30 ○ ○ 

�10-24 

Deceleration Time for 

Internal 

Position/Waiting Time 

for Switching Max. 

Frequency 

0.00~600.00 sec/00~6000.0 sec 3.00 

3.0 

○ ○ 

�10-27 


Load A1 

1~65535 100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-28 


Motor B1 

1~65535 100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-29 


Load A2 

1~65535 100 ○ ○ ○ 

�10-30 


Motor B2 

1~65535 100 ○ ○ ○ 





11-00 

�11-10 

System Control 

Speed Feed Forward 

Gain 





Factory 

Setting 


0 ○ ○ 

0~100% 0 ○ 


4.3 Description of Parameter Settings 


Group 0 User Parameters �: This parameter can be set during operation. 

00-00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive 

Control 

mode 


Settings Read Only 

00-01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive 

Control 

mode 



Factory setting: ## 

Factory setting: ## 

� Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated 

voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following 

table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor 

drive correspond to the identity code. 

� Pr.00-01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user 

can check if the AC motor drive is correct. 

� The factory setting is rated current for the constant torque and can be set in Pr.00-12. 

230V Series 

kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 

HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 

Pr.00-00 

Rated Current 

4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 

for Constant 

Torque (A) 

Rated Current 

5 7.5 11 17 25 33 49 65 75 90 120 146 

for Variable 

Torque (A) 

6.3 9.4 13.8 21.3 31.3 41.3 61.3 81.3 93.8 113 150 183 

Max. Carrier 

Frequency 

15kHz 9kHz 

460V Series 

kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 

HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 

Pr.00-00 

Rated Current 

5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 

for Constant 

Torque (A) 

Rated Current 

3 4.2 6 8.5 13 18 24 32 38 45 60 73 91 110 150 

for Variable 

Torque (A) 

3.8 5.3 7.5 10.6 16.3 22.5 30 40 47.5 56.3 75 91.3 113.8 138 188 

Max. Carrier 

Frequency 

15kHz 9kHz 6kHz 



00-02 Parameter Reset 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: 0 

Settings 0 No Function 

1 Read Only 

2 Enable Group 11 Parameters Setting 

8 Keypad Lock 

9 All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 220V/380V) 

10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V) 

� When it is set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr.00-00~00-07 and it can be used 

with password setting for password protection. 

� This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault 

records (Pr.06-17 ~ Pr.06-22). 

50Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 50Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230V or 400V. 

60Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 60Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230Vor 460V. 

� When Pr.00-02=08, the KPV-CE01 keypad is locked and only Pr.00-02 can be set. To unlock 

the keypad, set Pr.00-02=00. 

� When Pr.00-02 is set to 1 or 8, Pr.00-02 setting should be set to 0 before setting to other 

setting. 

� After setting Pr.00-02 to 2, it can display group 11 to re-connect the keypad after disconnection 

or re-power on after the power off. 

00-03 �Start-up Display Selection 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Display the frequency command value. (LED F) 

1 Display the actual output frequency (LED H) 

2 Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U) 

3 Display the output current (A) 

� This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive. 


00-04 �Content of Multi-Function function Display 


Control 

mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: 0 

Settings 0 Display the output current in A supplied to the motor U 

1 

Display the counter value which counts the number of 

pulses on TRG terminal (c) U 

2 Display actual output frequency (H) U 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC 

U 

motor drive (U) 

Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U, V, W 

U 

to the motor (E) 

Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U, V, W 

U 

to the motor (n) 

Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V and W 

U 

to the motor (P) 

Display the actual motor speed in rpm (enabled when 

using with PG card) (r00: positive speed; -00: negative 

speed) 

Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates 

to current (t0.0: positive torque; -0.0: negative torque) 

9 Display PG position (refer to NOTE1) U 

10 Display analog feedback signal value in % (b) U 

11 

12 

13 

Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal in %. 

Range 0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (1.) (refer to 

NOTE 2) 

Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal in %. 

Range 4~20mA/0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (2.) 

(refer to NOTE 2) 

Display the signal of AUI analog input terminal in %. 

Range -10V~10V corresponds to -100~100%. (3.) (refer 

to NOTE 2) 

14 Display the temperature of heat sink in °C. (t.) U 

15 Display the temperature of IGBT in °C (T) U 

16 

17 

Display digital input status ON/OFF (Pr.02-10) (i) (refer 

U 

to NOTE 3) 

Display digital output status ON/OFF (Pr.02-15) (o) 

U 



U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U


00-04 �Content of Multi-Function function Display 

NOTE 

18 Display multi-step speed (S) U 

19 

20 

21 

The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (i.) 

U 


The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (o.) 

U 


Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card). 

When the motor direction is changed or drive is stop, 

U 

the counter will start from 0 (display will be changed to 

0) (Max. 65535) (Z) 

22 Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (4) U 

23 Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (max. 65535) (4.) H 

U 

24 

25 

26 

27 

Pulse position control for whole operation (MI=37 and 

MI=ON) (P.) (refer to NOTE5) 

Display the present reel diameter under the tension 

U 

control in mm (d) 

Display the present line speed under the tension control 

U 

in m/min (L) U 

Display the present tension setting under the tension F 

control in N (T.) 

H 

U 

1. When Pr.10-00 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-01 is set to 1/2, the display range for PG feedback will 

be from 0 to 4000. 

When Pr.10-00 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-01 is set to 3/4/5, the display range for PG feedback 

will be from 0 to 1000. 

Home position: If it has Z phase, Z phase will be regarded as home position. Otherwise, home 

position will be the encoder start up position. 

2. It can display negative values when setting analog input bias (Pr.03-03~03-08). 

Example 1: assume that AVI input voltage is 0V, Pr.03-03 is 10.0% and Pr.03-06 is 4 (Serve 

bias as the center), the display will be U . 

Example 2: when AUI input voltage is -10V, it will display U . 

3. Example: If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the following table shows the status of the terminals. 

0: OFF, 1: ON 


F


Terminal MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD 

Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 

If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 0110 in binary and 0086H in HEX. 

4. 

When Pr.00-04 is set to “16” or “19”, it will display “0086” with LED U is ON on the keypad KPV- 

CE01. The setting 16 is the status of digital input by Pr.02-10 setting and the setting 19 is the 

corresponding CPU pin status of digital input. User can set to 16 to monitor digital input status 

and then set to 19 to check if the wire is normal. 

Assume that MRA: Pr.02-11 is set to 9 (Drive ready). After applying the power to the AC motor 

drive, if there is no other abnormal status, the contact will be ON. The display status will be 

shown as follows. 

Terminal Reserved Reserved Reserved MO2 MO1 RA MRA 

Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 

At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it will display 0001 with LED U is ON on the 

keypad. The setting 17 is the status of digital output by Pr.02-15 setting and the setting 20 is the 

corresponding CPU pin status of digital output. User can set 17 to monitor the digital output 

status and then set to 20 to check if the wire is normal. 

5. When Pr.00-04 is set to 24, user can get the difference between the pulse command and actual 

motor position to adjust Pr.11-18 by this display. 

00-05 �User Defined Coefficient K 

Control 

mode 


Settings Digit 4: decimal point number (0 to 3) 

Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999 

� It is used digital setting method 

Digital 4: decimal point number (0: no decimal point, 1: 1 decimal point and so on.) 

Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999 (the corresponding value for the max. frequency). 

Digital 4 

F 

H 

U 

3 2 1 0 

corresponding value 

decimal point number 

For example, if use uses rpm to display the motor speed and the corresponding value to the 4-pole 

motor 60Hz is 1800. This parameter can be set to 01800 to indicate that the corresponding value for 

60Hz is 1800rpm. If the unit is rps, it can be set 10300 to indicate the corresponding value for 60Hz is 

30.0 (a decimal point). 



00-06 Software Version 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: Read Only 


Display #.## 

00-07 �Password Input Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535 

Display 00~02 (times of wrong password) 

� The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00-08. Input the correct 

password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts. 

After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “PcodE” will show up to force the user to restart 

the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password. 

� When forgetting password, you can decode by setting 9999 and press button and repeat 

it again (setting 9999 and press button 

to factory setting. 

again). Please note that all the settings will be set 

00-08 �Password Set 

Control 

mode 

Unit: 1 


Settings 1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535 

Display 00 No password set or successful input in Pr. 00-07 

01 Password has been set 

� To set a password to protect your parameter settings. 

If the display shows 00, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.00- 

07. All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00-08. 

The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display 

will show 01. 

Be sure to record the password for later use. 

To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 00 after inputting correct password into Pr. 

00-07. 

The password consists of min. 2 digits and max. 5 digits. 


� How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00-07: 


Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00-08 (Or you can enter a new password if you 

want to use a changed or new one). 

Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered. 

Password Decode Flow Chart 

Password Setting Decoding Flow Chart 

00-08 

Displays 01 when 

entering correct 

password into 

Pr.00-08. 

Forge tting Passwrod 

00-07 

00-08 



password into 

Pr.00-07. 

Afte r entering 9999, press PRO G 

DATA 

and repeat it again (ent er 9999 , 

press PRO G 

DATA 

to decode. Th e 

paramete r setting will be set to 

factory setting. 

00-09 �Energy Saving Gain 

Control 

mode 

Correct Password 

END 

00-08 



password into 

Pr.00-07. 

00-07 

Incorrect Password 

END 

00-07 

3 c hanc es to enter the correct 

password. 

1st time displays "01" if 

password is incorrect. 

2nd time displays "02", if 

password is incorrect. 

3rd time displays "P code" 

(blinking) 

If the password was entered 

incorrectly after three tries, 

the keypad will be locked. 

Turn the power OFF/ON to 

re- enter the password. 

Unit: 1 

FOCPG Factory setting: 100% 

Settings 10~1000 % 

� When Pr.00-19 is set to1, this parameter can be used for energy saving. The setting should be 

decreased when the energy saving is not well. When the motor is vibrated, the setting should 

be increased. 

00-10 Control Method 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 V/f control 

1 V/f + Encoder (VFPG) 



2 Sensorless vector control (SVC) 

3 FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG) 

4 Torque control + Encoder (TQCPG) 

� This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive: 

Setting 0: user can design V/f ratio by requirement and control multiple motors simultaneously. 

Setting 1: User can use PG card with Encoder to do close-loop speed control. 

Setting 2: To have optimal control characteristic by auto-tuning. 

Setting 3: To increase torque and control speed precisely. (1:1000) 

Setting 4: To increase accuracy for torque control. 

� When Pr.00-10 is set to 3, FOCPG control diagram is shown as follows. 

00-20 + 

11-10 

Speed Feed 

Forward Gain 

Position control diagram 

- 

flux weakening curve 

actual frequency 

position 

command 

+ 

+ 

ASR 

+ 

torque limit 10-09 

Pr.11-00 Bit 0=0 

07-32~07-35 

10-04~10-07, 

no offset 

10-21~10-22 

by analog input (Pr.03-00) 

Pr.11-00 Bit 0=1 

Tq Bias torque offset setting (Pr. 07-28) 

11-02~11-04, 

controlled by external terminals (Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31) 

11-10~11-11 

07-27 

A 

B 

Electrical gear 

10-17 

10-18 

ld 

command 

lq 

command 

current 

limit 

current 

measure 

Control Di agra m for the Ve ctor + Torque 

+ 

d 

dt 

- 

position 

feedback 

11-17 

IGBT 

& 

PWM 


kp 

11-00 bit 0=0 

11-18 

or 11-00 bit 0=1 

11-11 

M 

01-01 

01-02 

05-01 

~ 

05-09 

current feedback 

kd 

10-23 

+ 

+ 

Encoder 

10-00 

10-01 

speed 

command

Current 

control 

flux weakening curve 

ld 

command 

actual frequency 


� When Pr.00-10 is set to 4, TQCPG control diagram is shown as follows. 

no offset 

by analog input (Pr.03-00) 

torque offset setting (Pr. 07-28) 

controlled by external terminals (Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31) 

torque 

+ 

command 

+ 

07-21 

06-12 07-23 

- 

07-24 or 00-20 

speed limit + 

or command - ASR 

Pr.11-00 Bit 0=0 

1 0- 04 ~10 -0 7, 

1 0- 21 ~10 -2 2 

Pr.11-00 Bit 0=1 

11-02~11-04, 

speed torque 

torque limit 10-09 mode switch 

07-32~07-35 

torque command 

11-10~11-11 

lq 

command 

00-11 V/f Curve Selection 

Control 

mode 

IGBT 

& 

PWM 


M 

01-01 

01-02 

05-01 

~05-09 

Current 

measure Current feedback 

Control Diagram for the Torque + Encoder 

Encoder 

10-00 

10-01 

VF VFPG Factory setting: 0 

Settings 0 V/f curve determined by group 01 

1 1.5 power curve 

2 Square curve 

� When it is set to 0, the V/f curve setting for the motor 1 is according to Pr.01-01~Pr.01-08 and 

Pr. 01-35~01-42 are for the motor 2. 

� When setting to 1 or 2, the settings of the 2 nd voltage/frequency and the 3 rd voltage/frequency 

are invalid. 

01-02 voltage% 

100 

90 

80 

70 

60 

50 

40 

1.5 Power curve 

30 

20 

10 

Square curve 

0 

20 40 60 80 100 

01-01 Frequency%


00-12 � Constant/Variable Torque Selection 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory setting: 0 

Settings 0 Constant Torque (150%) 

1 Variable Torque (120%) 

� When “1” is selected, the oL level is 120% of rated drive current. All other overload ratings will 

not change, example: 150% of rated drive current for 60 seconds. 

00-13 � Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Linear accel./decel. 

1 Auto accel., linear decel. 

2 Linear accel., auto decel. 

3 Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load) 

4 Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21) 

� It can decrease the drive’s vibration during load starts and stops by setting this parameter. 

Also it will speed up to the setting frequency with the fastest and smoothest start-up current 

when it detects small torque. At deceleration, it will auto stop the drive with the fastest and the 

smoothest deceleration time when the regenerated voltage of the load is detected. 

Frequency 

01-00 

Max. 

1 

Frequency 

1 When Pr.00-13 is set to 0. 

2 

2 When Pr.00-13 is set to 3. 

Min. 

Frequency 

01-05 

accel. time 

decel. time 

01-12 01-14 01-13 01-15 

01-16 01-18 01-17 01-19 


00-14 Time Unit for Acceleration/Deceleration and S Curve 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Unit: 0.01 second 

1 Unit: 0.1 second 


Time


� This parameter determines the time unit for the Acceleration/Deceleration setting. Refer to 

Pr.01-12 ~ Pr.01-19 (accel./decel. Time 1 to 4), Pr. 01-20~Pr.01-21 (JOG accel./decel. Time) 

and Pr. 01-24~Pr.01-27 (S curve accel./decel. Time). 



00-17 �Carrier Frequency 

Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1~15kHz 

� This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive. 

Models 

1-5HP 

0.75-3.7kW 

230V/460V Series 

7.5-25HP 

5.5-18.5kW 

30-60HP 

22-45kW 

75-100HP 

55-75Kw 

Setting Range 01~15kHz 01~15kHz 01~09kHz 01~06kHz 

Factory Setting 10kHz 9kHz 6kHz 6kHz 

Carrier 

Frequency 

1kHz 

8kHz 

15kHz 

Acoustic 

Noise 

Significant 

Minimal 

Electromagnetic 

Noise or Leakage 

Current 

Heat 

Dissipation 

Minimal Minimal 

Significant Significant 

Current 

Wave 

� From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the 

electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise. 

00-18 �Auto Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Enable AVR 

1 Disable AVR 

2 Disable AVR when deceleration stop 

� It is used to select the AVR mode. AVR is used to regulate the output voltage to the motor. For 

example, if V/f curve is set to AC200V/50Hz and the input voltage is from 200 to 264VAC, the 

output voltage won’t excess AC200V/50Hz. If the input voltage is from 180 to 200V, the output 

voltage to the motor and the input voltage will be in direct proportion. 



� When setting Pr.00-18 to 1 during ramp to stop and used with auto accel./decel. function, the 

acceleration will be smoother and faster. 

� It is recommended to set Pr.00-18 to 0 (enable AVR) when the control mode is FOCPG or 

TQCPG. 

00-19 � Auto Energy-saving Operation 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Disable 

1 Enable 

� When the Auto Energy-saving function is enabled, the drive will operate with full voltage during 

acceleration and deceleration. At constant speed, the AC drive will calculate the optimal output 

voltage value for the load. It is possible for the output voltage to be 25% below Maximum 

Output Voltage during auto energy-saving operation. This function should not be used with 

variable loads or continuous rated output loads. 

� When output frequency is constant, i.e. constant operation, the output voltage will be auto 

decreased with load reduction. To make the AC motor drive runs under the energy-saving with 

the minimum value of the product of voltage and current. 

Output Voltage 

100% 

75% 

The maximum output voltage 

reduction is 25%. 

Auto Energy-saving Operation 

00-20 � Source of the Master Frequency Command 

Control 

mode 

Frequency 


Settings 0 Digital keypad (KPV-CE01) 

1 RS-485 serial communication 

2 External analog input (Pr. 03-00) 

3 External UP/DOWN terminal 

4 Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-15 without direction) 

5 Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-15) 


� This parameter determines the drive’s master frequency source. 

� When it is set to 0, it will display “PU”. 

00-21 � Source of the Operation Command 

Control 

mode 



Settings 0 Digital keypad (KPV-CE01) 

1 External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled. 

2 RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Keypad STOP disabled. 

� When Pr.00-21 is set to 1, it also needs to set Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21 to 0. After pressing PU 

key to make LED PU to be light, RUN, JOG and STOP key are valid now. 

00-22 � Stop Method 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Ramp to stop 

1 Coast to stop 

� The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid 

Operation 

Command 

stop command. 

Output 

Frequency 

Output 

Frequency 

Time 

Operation 

Free running 

to stop 

RUN STOP Command RUN STOP 

Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates from the maximum output frequency (Pr. 01- 

00) to minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09) according to the deceleration time and then 

stop. 

Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon a STOP command and 

the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill. 


Time


(1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safely of personnel or to prevent material 

from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped. 

The deceleration time has to be set accordingly. 

(2) If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to 

select “coast to stop”. For example, blowers, punching machines and pumps. 

� The stop method of the torque control is also set by Pr.00-22. 

00-23 � Motor Direction Control 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Enable forward/reverse 

1 Disable reverse 

2 Disable forward 

� This parameter enables the AC motor drives to run in the forward/reverse Direction. It may be 

used to prevent a motor from running in a direction that would consequently injure humans or 

damage the equipment. 


Group 1 Basic Parameters 

01-00 Maximum Output Frequency 

Control 

mode 


Unit: 0.01 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: 60.00/50.00 

Settings 50.0 to 600.00Hz 

� This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC 

motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA and -10V to 

+10V) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range. 

01-01 1st Output Frequency Setting 1 

01-35 1st Output Frequency Setting 2 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: 60.00/50.00 

Settings 0.00~600.00Hz 

� These are for the base frequency and motor rated frequency. 

� This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the 

motor nameplate. If the motor is 60Hz, the setting should be 60Hz. If the motor is 50Hz, it 

should be set to 50Hz. 

� Pr.01-35 is used for the application occasion that uses double base motor. 

01-02 1st Output Voltage Setting 1 

01-36 1st Output Voltage Setting 2 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 220.0 

460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 440.0 

� These are for the base frequency and motor rated frequency. 

� This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor 

nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0. If the motor is 200V, it should be 

set to 200.0. 

� There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also 

difference. The economic and convenience method to solve this problem is to install the AC 

motor drive. There is no problem to use with the different voltage and frequency and also can 

amplify the original characteristic and life of the motor. 



01-03 2nd Output Frequency Setting 1 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG Factory setting: 0.50 


01-04 �2nd Output Voltage Setting 1 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG 



01-37 2nd Output Frequency Setting 2 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG Factory setting: 0.50 


01-38 �2nd Output Voltage Setting 2 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG 



01-05 3rd Output Frequency Setting 1 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG Factory Setting: 0.50 


01-06 �3rd Output Voltage Setting 1 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode VF VFPG 



01-39 3rd Output Frequency Setting 2 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG Factory Setting: 0.50 


01-40 �3rd Output Voltage Setting 2 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode VF VFPG 



01-07 4th Output Frequency Setting 1 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory Setting: 0.00 




01-08 �4th Output Voltage Setting 1 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG 



01-41 4th Output Frequency Setting 2 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 0.00 


01-42 �4th Output Voltage Setting 2 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode VF VFPG 



� V/f curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay special 

attention to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity, if the loading 

characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor. 

� For the V/f curve setting, it should be Pr.01-01≥ Pr.01-03≥ Pr.01-05≥ Pr.01-07. There is no 

limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at the low frequency may cause motor damage, 

overheat, stall prevention or over-current protection. Therefore, please use the low voltage at 

the low frequency to prevent motor damage. 

� Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/f curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals Pr.02- 

01 to Pr.02-14 is set to 14 and enabled or switch to the Δ-connection, the AC motor drive will 

act as the 2nd V/f curve. 

� The V/f curve for the motor 1 is shown as follows. The V/f curve for the motor 2 can be 

deduced from it. 

Voltage 

Output Freque ncy 

1st Ou tput Output Freque ncy 

01-11 

01-10 Upp er Limit 

Voltage Setting Lower Limit 

01-02 

Frequ ency outpu t 

2nd Ou tput 

ranges limitat ion 

Voltage Setting 

01-04 

Reg ular V/f Curve 

3 rd Ou tput 

Special V/f Cu rve 


01-06 

4th Ou tput 


Frequ ency 

01-08 01-07 01-09 01-05 01-03 01-01 01-00 

4th Freq. 3rd Freq. 1st Freq. Maximum Outp ut 

Start Freq. 2nd Freq. 

Frequ ency 

V/f Curve 



01-09 Start Frequency Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives’ output will be from start 

frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details. 

Fcmd=frequency command, 

Fstart=start frequency (Pr.01-09), 

fstart=actual start frequency of drive, 

Fmin=4th output frequency setting (Pr.01-07/Pr.01-41), 

Flow=output frequency lower limit (Pr.01-11) 

Fcmd>Fmin 

YES 

Fstart>Fmin 

YES 

fstart=Fstart 

Fcmd 

Fstart 

Fmin 

Flow=0 

YES 

H=Fcmd 

Hz 

NO 

by Pr.01-34 

NO fstart=Fmin 

operation after 

start-up 

NO 

by 

Pr.01-34 

Fcmd1 

Fmin 

Fcmd2 

Time Flow 

NO 

Hz 

60Hz 

Flow=0 

Fcmd>Flow 

YES 

H=Fcmd 

Hz 

Fcmd 

Fmin 

Fstart 


NO 

YES 

Fcmd>Fmin 

YES 

H=Fcmd 

H=Fcmd1 

Fcmd1>Flow& 

Fcmd1>Fmin 

Time 

by Pr.01-34 

Fcmd2>Flow& 

Fcmd2Fmin 

Time 

by Pr.01-34 

Fmin>Fcmd2

Fcmd>Fmin 

YES 

Fstart>Fmin 

YES 

fstart=Fstart 

Fcmd 

Flow=0 

YES 

H=Fcmd 

Hz 

Fstart 

Fmin 

NO 

by Pr.01-34 

NO fstart=Fmin 

operation after 

start-up NO 

by 

Pr.01-34 

Fcmd1 

Fmin 

Fcmd2 

Time Flow 

NO 

Hz 

60Hz 

Flow=0 

Fcmd>Flow 


YES 

H=Fcmd 

Hz 

Fcmd 


NO 

YES 

Fcmd>Fmin 

YES 

H=Fcmd 

H=Fcmd1 

Fcmd1>Flow & 

Fcmd1>Fmin 

Time 

by Pr.01-34 

Fcmd2>Flow & 

Fcmd2Fmin 

Time 

by Pr.01-34 

Fmin>Fcmd2 

01-10 Output Frequency Upper Limit Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



01-11 Output Frequency Lower Limit Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the 

frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will run with the upper limit frequency. If 

output frequency lower than output frequency lower limit and frequency setting is higher than


min. frequency, it will run with lower limit frequency. The upper limit frequency should be set to 

be higher than the lower limit frequency. 

Voltage 

Output Frequency 

1st Output Output Frequency 

Upper Limit 

Voltage Setting 1 01-11 Lower Limit 

01-10 

01-02 

Frequency output 

2nd Output 

ranges limitation 

Voltage Setting 1 

01-04 

Regular V/f Curve 

3rd Output 

Special V/f Curve 


01-06 

4th Output 


01-08 01-07 01-09 01-05 01-03 01-01 01-00 

Frequency 

4th Freq. 3rd Freq. 1st Freq. 

Start Freq. 2nd Freq. 

V/f Curve 

Maximum Output 

Frequency 

01-12 �Accel. Time 1 Unit: 0.1/0.01 

01-13 �Decel. Time 1 Unit: 0.1/0.01 







Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory Setting: 10.00/10.0 

Settings 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 

01-20 � JOG Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1/0.01 

01-21 � JOG Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1/0.01 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec 

� The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp 

from 0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00). 

� The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time require for the AC motor drive to 

decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0Hz. 

� The Acceleration/Deceleration Time is invalid when using Pr.00-13 Optimal 

Acceleration/Deceleration Setting. 



� The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input 

Terminals settings. See Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-30 for details. 

� When enabling torque limit and stall prevention function, actual accel./decel. time will longer 

than the above action time. 

Frequency 

01-00 

Max. Output 

Frequency 

Frequency 

Setting 

accel. time decel. time 

01-12,14,16,18,20 01-13,15,17,19,21 


01-22 � JOG Frequency Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� Both external terminal JOG and key “JOG” on the keypad can be used. When the jog 

command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22). 

When the jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero. 

The used Accel./Decel. time is set by the Jog Accel./Decel. time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21). 

� The JOG command can’t be executed when the AC motor drive is running. In the same way, 

when the JOG command is executing, other operation commands are invalid except 

forward/reverse commands and STOP key on the digital keypad. 

01-23 �1st/4th Accel./decel. Frequency Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter selects the frequency point for transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 

to acceleration/deceleration time 4. 

� The transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 to acceleration/deceleration time 4, may 

also be enabled by the external terminals (Pr. 02-01 to 02-08). The external terminal has 

priority over Pr. 01-23. 


Time


Frequency 

01-23 

1st/4th 

Acceleration 

/Deceleration 

Freq. 

1st Acceleration 

Time 1st Deceleration 

Time 

4th Acceleration Time 

4th Deceleration 

Time 

1st/4th Acceleration/Deceleration Switching 

01-24 � S-curve for Acceleration Departure Time 1 Unit: 0.1/0.01 

01-25 � S-curve for Acceleration Arrival Time 2 Unit: 0.1/0.01 

01-26 � S-curve for Deceleration Departure Time 1 Unit: 0.1/0.01 

01-27 � S-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time 2 Unit: 0.1/0.01 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec 

� It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve 

can adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel. When it is enabled, the drive will have different 

accel./decel. curve by the accel./decel. time. 

� The S-curve function is disabled when accel./decel. time is set to 0. 

� When the selected accel. time ≥ Pr.01-24 and Pr.01-25, 

The Actual Accel. Time = selected accel. Time + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25)/2 

� When the selected decel. time ≥ Pr.01-26 and Pr.01-27, 

The Actual Decel. Time = selected decel. Time + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27)/2 

Frequency 

01-25 

01-26 

01-24 

01-27 

Time 

01-28 Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit) Unit: 0.01 

01-29 Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit) Unit: 0.01 







Control 

mode 



� These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. The skip frequencies are 

useful when a motor has vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. By skipping this 

frequency, the vibration will be avoided. 

01-34 Mode Selection when Frequency< Fmin 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory Setting: 0 

Settings 0 Output Waiting 

1 Zero-speed operation 

2 Fmin (4th output frequency setting) 

� When the frequency is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), it will operate by this parameter. 

� When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from 

terminals U/V/W. 

� When setting 1, it will execute DC brake by Vmin(Pr.01-08 and Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG and 

SVC modes. 

� When it is set to 2, the AC motor drive will run by Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41) and Vmin (Pr.01- 

08, Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG, SVC and FOCPG modes. 

� In V/f, VFPG and SVC modes 

fout 

fmin 

01-07 

0Hz 

01-34=0 

stop output 

0Hz 

stop waiting for output 

01-34=1 

0Hz operation 

(DC brake) 

01-34=2 



� In FOCPG mode, when Pr.01-34 is set to 2, it will act according Pr.01-34 setting. 

fout 

fmin 

01-07 

01-34=0 


01-34=1 


01-34=2 



02-00 �2-wire/3-wire Operation Control 

Control 

mode 



Settings 0 FWD/STOP, REV/STOP 

1 FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout) 

2 RUN/STOP, REV/FWD 

3 RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout) 

4 3-wire (momentary push button) 

5 3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start Lockout) 

� Three of the six methods include a “Line Start Lockout” feature. When line start lockout is 

enabled, the drive will not run once applying the power. The Line Start Lockout feature doesn’t 

guarantee the motor will never start under this condition. It is possible the motor may be set in 

motion by a malfunctioning switch. 

02-00 Control Circuits of the External Terminal 

0, 1 

2-wire operation control (1) 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

2, 3 

2-wire operation control (2) 

RUN/STOP 

REV/FWD 

4, 5 

3-wire operation control 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

RUN/STOP 

FWD/REV 




STOP 

REV/FWD 

FWD:("OPEN":STOP) 

("CLOSE":FWD) 

REV:("OPEN": STOP) 

("CLOSE": REV) 

DCM 

VFD-VE 

FWD:("OPEN":STOP) 

("CLOSE":RUN) 

REV:("OPEN": FWD) 

("CLOSE": REV) 

DCM 

VFD-VE 

FWD "CLOSE":RUN 

MI1 "OPEN":STOP 

REV/FWD "OPEN": FWD 

"CLOSE": REV 

DCM 

VFD-VE 


RUN 

Factory Setting: 1 


Factory Setting: 3








02-26 Multi-Function Input Command 10 (MIA) 

02-27 Multi-Function Input Command 11 (MIB) 

02-28 Multi-Function Input Command 12 



Settings 0-50 












Settings 

VF 

Control Mode 

VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG 

0: no function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


command 1 

○ ○ ○ ○ 


command 2 

○ ○ ○ ○ 


command 3 

○ ○ ○ ○ 


command 4 

○ ○ ○ ○ 

5: Reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

6: JOG command ○ ○ ○ ○ 

7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit ○ ○ ○ ○ 

8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection ○ ○ ○ ○ 

9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection ○ ○ ○ ○ 

10: EF input (07-36) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

11: B.B. input ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

12: Output stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


� 


Settings 

VF 

Control Mode 


13: cancel the setting of the optimal 


○ ○ ○ ○ 

14: switch between drive settings 1 and 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ 

15: operation speed command form AVI ○ ○ ○ ○ 

16: operation speed command form ACI ○ ○ ○ ○ 

17: operation speed command form AUI ○ ○ ○ ○ 

18: Emergency Stop (07-36) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

19: Digital Up command ○ ○ ○ ○ 

20: Digital Down command ○ ○ ○ ○ 



23: input the counter value (multi-function input command 

6) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



26: TQCPG/FOCPG mode selection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

27: ASR1/ASR2 selection ○ ○ ○ ○ 



30: Signal confirmation for connection ○ ○ ○ ○ 





35: Enable position control ○ ○ ○ ○ 

36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid at 

stop) 

○ ○ 

37: Enable pulse position input command ○ ○ ○ ○ 



40: Force stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 








48: Mechanical Gear Ratio Switch ○ ○ ○ 

49: Enable Drive 

50: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

� This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal. 

� The terminals of Pr.02-23~Pr.02-27 are virtual and set as MI7~MIB when using with optional 

card EMV-APP01 

� If Pr.02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control. Terminal MI1 is needed for the 3 rd wire position. 

Therefore, MI1 is not allowed for any other operation. 

� Multi-function input commands 7-14 are the extension terminals of Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06. There 

are 14 terminals but the terminals 7-14 are virtual terminals and you can set the status of bit 8- 



15 of Pr.02-10 to ON or OFF by KPV-CE01 or communication. 

Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is 

closed, OFF: contact is open) 

Settings Functions Descriptions 

0 No Function 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Multi-step speed 

command 1/multi-step 

position command 1 


command 2/ multi-step 








5 Reset 

6 JOG Command JOG operation 

7 

8 

9 

Acceleration/deceleration 

Speed Inhibit 

The 1 st , 2 nd acceleration 

or deceleration time 

selection 

The 3 rd , 4 th acceleration 

or deceleration time 

selection 

10 EF Input External fault input terminal 

11 B.B. Input 

12 Output Stop 

13 

15 step speeds could be conducted through the digital statuses 

of the 4 terminals, and 17 in total if the master speed and JOG 

are included. (Refer to Pr. 04-00~04-29) 

After the error of the drive is eliminated, use this terminal to 

reset the drive. 

When this function is enabled, acceleration and deceleration is 

stopped and the AC motor drive start to accel./decel. from the 

inhibit point. 

The acceleration/deceleration time of the drive could be 

selected from this function or the digital statuses of the 

terminals; there are 4 acceleration/deceleration speeds in total 

for selection. 

When this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off 

immediately, and the motor will be free run and display B.B. 

signal. Refer to Pr.07-08 for details. 

If this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off 

immediately, and the motor will then be free run. And once it is 

turned to OFF, the drive will accelerate to the setting frequency. 

Cancel the setting of the 

optimal accel./decel. time Before using this function, Pr.00-13 should be set to 01/02/03/04 

first. When this function is enabled, OFF is for auto mode and 



14 

15 

16 

17 

Switch between drive 

settings 1 and 2 

Operation speed 

command form AVI 


command form ACI 


command form AUI 

18 Emergency Stop (07-36) 

19 Digital Up command 

20 Digital Down command 

ON is for linear accel./decel. 


When the contact is ON: use the motor 2 parameters. OFF: use 

the motor 1 parameters. 

When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force to 

be AVI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI 

and AUI at the same time. The priority is AVI>ACI>AUI) 

When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force to 

be ACI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI 

and AUI at the same time. The priority is AVI>ACI>AUI) 

When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will 

force to be AUI. (If the operation speed commands are set to 

AVI, ACI and AUI at the same time. The priority is AVI>ACI> 

AUI) 

When the contact is ON, the drive will ramp to stop by Pr.07-36 

setting. 

When the contact is ON, the frequency will be increased and 

decreased. If this function keeps ON, the frequency will be 

increased/decreased by Pr.02-07/Pr.02-08. 

21 PID function disabled When the contact is ON, the PID function is disabled. 

22 Clear counter 

23 

Input the counter value 

(multi-function input 

command 6) 

24 FWD JOG command 

25 REV JOG command 

26 

TQCPG/FOCPG mode 

selection 

When the contact is ON, it will clear current counter value and 

display “0”. Only when this function is disabled, it will keep 

counting upward. 

The counter value will increase 1 once the contact is ON. It 

needs to be used with Pr.02-16. 

When the contact is ON, the drive will execute forward Jog 

command. 

When the contact is ON the drive will execute reverse Jog 

command. 

When the contact is ON: TQCPG mode. 

When the contact is OFF: FOCPG mode. 




27 ASR1/ASR2 selection 

28 Emergency stop (EF1) 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

Signal confirmation for Yconnection 

Signal confirmation for 

Δ−connection 

High torque bias (by 

Pr.07-29) 

Middle torque bias (by 

Pr.07-30) 

Low torque bias (by 

Pr.07-31) 

Enable multi-step 

position control 

RU N/STOP 

command 

Mul ti- func ti on i np ut 

terminal is set to 26 

(torque/speed 

mode switch) 

03 -0 0~03=1 sp eed 

(AVI/AUI/ACI is command 

fr equency command) 

03 -0 0~03=2 

torque 

(AVI/AUI/ACI is limit 

tor que co mman d) 

control 

mode 

sp eed 

co ntrol 

speed limit sp eed 

command 

speed limit 

torque 

command 

torque 

control 

torque 

command 


torque 

limit 

sp eed 

co ntrol 

torque 

control 

Switch timing for t orq ue/speed control 

(00-10=3/4 , mu lt i-fu nct ion inpu t t erminal is set to 2 6) 

sp eed 

co ntrol 

(decel. t o stop ) 

When the contact is ON: speed will be adjusted by ASR 2 

setting. OFF: speed will be adjusted by ASR 1 setting. Refer to 

Pr.10-08 for details. 

When the contact is ON, the drive will execute emergency stop. 

(it will have fault code record) 

When is the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/f. 

When the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/f. 

Refer to Pr.07-27~07-31 for details. 

When the contact is ON, the corresponding 15-step speed for 

the multi-function inputs 1-4 will be 15 positions. (Refer to Pr.04- 

15 to Pr.04-29)



speed mode position mode speed mode 

35 Enable position control 

Run 

MI=d35 

MI=d34 

MI=d1 

MI=d2 

MI=d3 

MI=d4 

output 

frequency 

Run 

MI=d34 

MI=d35 

MI=d1 

MI=d2 

MI=d3 

MI=4 

Master 

frequency 

Output 

frequency 


1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

0 

0 

1 

1 

0 

0 

1 

10-19 

position 

(Home) 

04-27 

multiposition 

13 

04-26 

multiposition 

12 

04-11 

12th step 

speed 

frequency 

speed mode position mode 

1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

0 

1 

04-12 

13th step 04-27 

speed multi- 

frequency position 

13 

1 

1 

0 

0 

1 

1 

04-26 

multiposition 

12 

When the contact is ON, the AC motor drive will start to execute 

internal position control by Pr.10-19. The decel. time of 

positioning is decided by Pr.10-24 and the positioning direction 

is by the motor direction.



36 

Enable multi-step 

position learning function 


Output 

frequency 

PG 

feedback 

10-00 

10-01 

RUN 

MI=d35 

MO=d39 

Output 

frequency 

PG 

feedback 

10-00 

10-01 

RUN 

MI=d35 

MO=d39 

10-24 

10-19 

RUN RUN 

Time 

10-19 


Time 

When the contact is ON, it will select the corresponding multiposition 

by the ON/OFF status of multi-function inputs 1-4 and 

written the current motor position into the corresponding multiposition.


37 

38 

39 

Enable pulse position 

input command 

Disable write EEPROM 

function 

Torque command 

direction 

Run/Stop 

MI=d1 

MI=d2 

MI=d3 

MI=d4 

MI=d36 

1011 =11 

2 

corresponds 

to Pr.04-25 

Writing the motor position 

into the Pr.04-25 



1 

1 

1010 2=10 

corresponds to 

Pr.04-24 

0 0 

1 1 

0 0 0 

1 1 1 

Writing the motor position 

into the Pr.04-24 

When Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5 and this contact is ON, the input 

pulse of PG card is position command. When using this function, 

it is recommended to set Pr.10-23 to 0. 

Example: When it is used with MI=d35 for returning home, 

please refer to the following diagram. 

RUN 

MI=d35 

MO=d39 

MI=d37 

pulse 

command 

output 

frequency 

internal 

positioning 

Time 

When this contact is ON, you can’t write into EEPROM. 

When the torque command source is AVI or ACI and this 

contact is ON, it is negative torque.



40 Force stop 

41 Serial position clock 

42 Serial position input 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

Analog input resolution 

selection 

Enable Reset initial reel 

diameter 

Reset initial reel 

diameter 1 

Reset initial reel 

diameter 2 

Reset PID control 

integration of tension 

When this contact is ON during operation, the drive will free run 

to stop. 

The position method of the main shaft: 

When using setting 41 and setting 42, it needs to use with 2 

input terminals for multi-position control. 

CNC 

Con tro ller 

(PLC) 

DO SPI Position Command Clock DI 

DO SPI Position Command Data 

DI 

transmission start 

1 2 3 4 11 12 

OSS 

Clock 

Rea dy for t ra nsmission 

OSS 

Dat a 

test example 

angle Encoder b11 b1 0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 

36 0 40 96 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

18 0 

40 95 

20 48 

1 

1 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

90 10 24 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

45 51 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

13 7 15 58 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 

30 8 35 04 

36 87 

1 

1 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

1 

1 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

Refer to Pr.10-25 for details. 

PG position 

co ntrol point 

Pr.10-19 

main 

shaft 

VFD-VE 

PG position 

co ntr ol point 

Pr.10-19 

main shaft 

VFD-VE 

When the drive is at stop and it is in tension control mode, it 

needs to set 3-step initial reel by the digital status of terminals 

45 and 46 (Pr.08-46~48). Using terminal 44 function after setting 

contact status of 45 and 46 as shown in the following table. 

MI=46 MI=45 MI=44 

OFF OFF ON: writing Pr.08-46 setting into Pr.08-54 

OFF ON ON: writing Pr.08-47 setting into Pr.08-54 

ON OFF ON: writing Pr.08-48 setting into Pr.08-54 

ON ON ON: reset Pr.08-54 setting to the factory 

setting 

When this contact is ON, the PID control integration of tension is 

reset. 



48 

Mechanical Gear Ratio 

Switch 

49 Enable Drive 

50 Reserved 

02-07 � UP/DOWN Key Mode 

Control 

mode 

02-08 

Control 

mode 


When this contact is ON, the mechanical gear ratio switch will 

be the second group A2/B2 (refer to Pr.10-29 and Pr.10-30). 

When this contact is ON, the output of drive will stop. 

RUN 

MI=d49 

RUN 

MI=d49 

RUN 

Time 

Start running 

02-34=0 no action 

02-34=1 Start running 


Time 

MI=d49 

Time 

deceleration to stop 

start running from 0Hz 

RUN 

MI=d49 

free run to stop 

Time 

02-34=0 no action 

02-34=1 

start running from 0Hz 


Settings 0 Up/down by the accel/decel time 

1 Up/down constant speed (Pr.02-08) 

� The Acceleration/Deceleration Speed of the UP/DOWN Key 

with Constant Speed 

Unit: 0.01 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory setting: 0.01 

Settings 0.01 ~ 1.00Hz/ms


� These settings are used when multi-function input terminals are set to 19/20. 

02-09 Digital Input Response Time Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: 0.005 

Settings 0.001~ 30.000 sec 

� This parameter is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time 

is confirmation time to prevent some uncertain interferences that would result in error (except 

for the counter input) in the input of the digital terminals (FWD, REV and MI1~6). Under this 

condition, confirmation for this parameter could be improved effectively, but the response time 

will be somewhat delayed. 

02-10 � Digital Input Operation Direction Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 ~ 65535 

� The setting of this parameter is decimal value. 

� This parameter is used to set the input signal level and it won’t be affected by the 

SINK/SOURCE status. 

� Bit0 is for FWD terminal, bit1 is for REV terminal and bit2 to bit15 is for MI1 to MI14. 

� User can change terminal status by communicating. 

For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1), MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed 

command 2). Then the forward + 2 nd step speed command=1001(binary)=9 (Decimal). Only 

need to set Pr.02-10=9 by communication and it can forward with 2 nd step speed. It doesn’t 

need to wire any multi-function terminal. 

bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 

MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD 

02-11 � Multi-function Output 1 RA, RB, RC (Relay1) 

02-12 

02-13 

� Multi-function Output 2 MRA, MRC (Relay2) 

� Multi-function Output 3 (MO1) 





02-14 � Multi-function Output 4 (MO2) 

02-35 � Multi-function Output 5 (MO3) (need to use with EMV-APP01) 

02-36 �Multi-function Output 5 6 (MO4) (need to use with EMV-APP01) 


02-37 � Multi-function Output 5 7 (MO3MO5) (need to use with EMV-APP01) 





02-42 � Multi-function Output 12 (MOA) (need to use with EMV-APP01) 

Settings 0-50 










Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed, 

OFF: contact is open) 

Settings 

VF 

Control Mode 



1: Operation indication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

2: Operation speed attained ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-21) ○ ○ ○ ○ 





9: Drive ready ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

13: Overheat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


15: PID feedback error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



Settings 

VF 

Control Mode 



21: Over voltage warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

22: Over-current stall prevention warning ○ ○ ○ 

23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

24: Operation mode indication ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

25: Forward command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

26: Reverse command ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

27: Output when current >= Pr.02-32 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

28: Output when current < Pr.02-32 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

31: Y-connection for the motor coil ○ ○ ○ ○ 


33: Zero speed (actual output frequency) ○ ○ ○ ○ 

34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency) ○ ○ ○ ○ 













47: Break release at stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


49: Reserved 

50: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


0 No Function 

1 Operation Indication Active when the drive is not at STOP. 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Master Frequency 

Attained 


Attained 1 (Pr.02-19) 


Attained 2 (Pr.02-21) 

Zero Speed (frequency 

command) 

Zero Speed with Stop 

(frequency command) 

Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency 

setting. 

Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-19) is attained. 

Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-21) is attained. 

Active when frequency command =0. (the drive should be at 

RUN mode) 

Active when frequency command =0 or stop. 



7 

8 

Over Torque (OT1) 

(Pr.06-06~06-08) 

Over Torque (OT2) 

(Pr.06-09~06-11) 


Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-06 (overtorque 

detection selection-OT1), Pr.06-07 (over-torque 

detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-08 (over-torque detection time- 

OT1). 

Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-09 (overtorque 

detection selection-OT2), Pr.06-10 (over-torque 

detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-11 (over-torque detection time- 

OT2). 

9 Drive Ready Active when the drive is ON and no abnormality detected. 

10 

User-defined Lowvoltage 

Detection 

Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low. (refer to Pr.06-00 

low voltage level) 

11 Malfunction Indication Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop). 

12 

Mechanical Brake 

Release (Pr.02-31) 

13 Overheat 

14 

Software Brake Signal 

Indication 

When drive runs after Pr.02-31, it will be ON. This function 

should be used with DC brake and it is recommended to use 

contact ”b”(N.C). 

Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn 

off the drive. (refer to Pr.06-05) 

This function is used in conjunction with a VFDB Brake Unit. 

The output will be activated when the drive needs help braking 

the load. A smooth deceleration is achieved by using this 

function. (refer to Pr.07-00) 

15 PID Feedback Error Active when the feedback signal is abnormal. 

16 Slip Error (oSL) Active when the slip error is detected. 

17 

18 

19 

Terminal Count Value 

Attained 

Preliminary Counter 

Value Attained 

Baseblock (B.B.) 

Indication 

Active when the counter reaches Terminal Counter Value 

(Pr.02-16). 

Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Counter Value 

(Pr.02-17). 

Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during 

baseblock. 

20 Warning Output Active when the warning is detected. 

21 Over-voltage Warning Active when the over-voltage is detected. 

22 

23 


Prevention Warning 


prevention Warning 

Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected. 

Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected. 




24 

Operation Mode 

Indication 

Active when the operation command is controlled by external 

terminal. 

25 Forward Command Active when the operation direction is forward. 

26 Reverse Command Active when the operation direction is reverse. 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

Output when Current >= 

Active when current is >= Pr.02-32. 

Pr.02-32 

Output when Current < 

Pr.02-32 

Output when frequency 

>= Pr.02-33 

Active when current is < Pr.02-32. 

Active when frequency is >= Pr.02-33. 

Output when Frequency 

Active when frequency is < Pr.02-33. 

< Pr.02-33 

Y-connection for the 

Motor Coil 

Δ�-connection for the 

Motor Coil 

Zero Speed (actual 

output frequency) 

Zero Speed with Stop 

(actual output 

frequency) 

Error Output Selection 1 

(Pr.06-23) 


(Pr.06-24) 


(Pr.06-25) 


(Pr.06-26) 


(Pr.10-19) 

Speed Attained 

(including zero speed) 

Active when PR.05-12 is less than PR.05-11 and time is more 

than Pr.05-30. 

Active when PR.05-12 is higher than PR.05-11 and time is 

more than Pr.05-30. 

Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should 

be at RUN mode) 

Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop. 

Active when Pr.06-23 is ON. 




Active when the PG position control point reaches Pr.10-19. 

Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting or 

stop. 



41 Multi-position Attained 

42 Crane Function 

43 

44 

45 

Motor Zero-speed 

Output (Pr.02-43) 

Max. Reel Diameter 

Attained 

Empty Reel Diameter 

Attained 

46 Broken Belt Detection 

47 Break Release at Stop 

48 

Error PID Feedback of 

Tension 

49 Reserved 

50 Reserved 

Example of crane function 


User can set any three multi-function input terminals to 41. The 

current position action status of these three terminals will be 

outputted. Example: if setting Pr.02-11, Pr.02-12 and Pr.02-13 

to 41 and only the multi-position of the second point has been 

done. Therefore, current status are RA (OFF), MRA (ON) and 

MO1 (OFF). In this way, their status is 010. 

This function should be used with Pr.02-31, Pr.02-32 and 

Pr.02-33. 

Active when setting Pr.07-16=Pr.02-33 and Fcmd > Pr.02-33 

and output current > Pr.02-32 and Time > Pr.02-31. 

The example of the crane application is in the following for 

your reference. 

Active when motor actual speed is less than Pr.02-43. 

Active when the reel diameter is equal to Pr.08-43 in the 

tension control mode. 

Active when the reel diameter is equal to Pr.08-44 in the 

tension control mode. 

In the tension control mode, the broken belt occurs when 1. 

line speed is higher than Pr.08-61, 2. the error of reel diameter 

exceeds Pr.08-61, 3. detection time exceeds Pr.08-62 

When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal 

will be ON if the frequency is less than Pr.02-33. After it is ON, 

it will be OFF when brake delay time exceeds Pr.02-31. 

Frequency 

command 


output MO=47 

RUN RUN 

Frequency 

command


Output 

Frequency 

Freq. command>02-31 

& output current >02-32 

Freq. command02-32 and time 

>02-31) 

02-31 

02-31 

It is recommended to be used with Dwell function (Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18) as shown in the following: 

07-16 Dwell 

Freq. 

at Accel. 

Output Freq. 

Multi-function output 

MO= 42 

( Activate when 

Fcmd >= 02-33 

output current > 02-32 

Time > 02-31) 

Set 07-16=02-33and 

output current >02-32 

07-15 

Dwell Time at Accel. 

02-31 

Brake Delay Time 

Set 07-18=02-33 and 

output current

it3 

MO2 

bit2 

MO1 

bit1 

RA 

bit0 

MRA 

Pr02-15 

0 0 0 1 1 

0 0 1 0 2 

0 0 1 1 3 

0 1 0 0 4 

0 1 0 1 5 

0 1 1 0 6 

0 1 1 1 7 

1 0 0 0 8 

1 0 0 1 9 

1 0 1 0 10 

1 0 1 1 11 

1 1 0 0 12 

1 1 0 1 13 

1 1 1 0 14 

1 1 1 1 15 


02-16 � Terminal Count Value Unit:1 

Control 

mode 



� The counter trigger can be set by the multi-function terminal MI6 (set Pr.02-06 to 23). Upon 

completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated (Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is 

set to 17). 

� When the display shows c5555, the drive has counted 5,555 times. If display shows c5555•, it 

means that real counter value is between 55,550 to 55,559. 

02-17 �Preliminary Count Value Unit:1 

Control 

mode 



� When the counter value reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal 

will be activated, provided one of Pr. 02-11 to 02-14 set to 18 (Preliminary Count Value 

Setting). This parameter can be used for the end of the counting to make the drive runs from 

the low speed to stop. 



Display value 

[00-04=01] 

TRG [02-06=23] 

Counter Trigger 

(output signal) 

Preliminary Counter Value 

(Pr.02-11 ~Pr.02-14) 

Terminal Counter Value 

02-13=18 

02-17=3 

02-14=17 02-16=5 

The width of trigger signal 

02-18 � Digital Output Gain Unit:1 

Control 

mode 



� It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and digital frequency 

output (pulse X work period=50%). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr.02-18. 

02-19 �Desired Frequency Attained 1 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory setting: 60.00/50.00 

02-20 � The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 


02-21 � Desired Frequency Attained 2 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory setting: 60.00/50.00 

02-22 � The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2 Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 

� Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output 

terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-11~Pr.02-14), this multi-function output terminal will be ON. 


Fcmd=60Hz 

02-21=40Hz 

02-22=2Hz 

02-19=10Hz 

02-20=2Hz 

02-11~14=3 

02-11~14=4 

H 


42Hz 

40Hz 

38Hz 

12Hz 

10Hz 

8Hz 

02-31 Brake Delay Time Unit:0.001 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: 0.000 

Settings 0.000~65.000 Sec 

� When the AC motor drive runs after Pr.02-31 delay time, the corresponding multi-function 

output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON. It is recommended to use this 

function with DC brake. 

frequency 

command 

Output 

frequency 

07 -0 2 

DC br ake 

time during 

star t-up 

A 


B=A 

07 -0 3 

DC br ake 

time during 

stop pi ng 

DC br ake DC br ake 

RUN/STOP RUN STOP 

Mul ti- func ti on o utpu t 

(me cha ni cal br ake re le ase ) 

Pr.02-11 to 02-14=12 

02-31 brake delay time 

Mec han ic al bra ke 

br ake d release 

bounce time of mechanical brake 

br ake d 

T


� If this parameter is used without DC brake, it will be invalid. Refer to the following operation 

timing. 

frequency 

command 

output 

frequency 

RUN/STOP 

Multi-function output 

(mechanical brake 

release) 

Pr.02-11 to 02-14=12 

mechanical brake 

zero 

speed 

brake 

RUN STOP 


B=A 

release 

A 

zero 

speed 

brake 

Time 

02-32 � Output Current Level Setting for External Terminals Unit:1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0~100% 

� When output current is higher or equal to Pr.02-32, it will activate multi-function output terminal 

(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 27). 

� When output current is lower than Pr.02-32, it will activate multi-function output terminal 


02-33 � Output Boundary for External Terminals Unit:0.01 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.00~+-60.00Hz 

� When output frequency is higher than Pr.02-33, it will activate the multi-function terminal 


� When output frequency is lower than Pr.02-33, it will activate the multi-function terminal 

(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 30).


02-34 � External Operation Control Selection after Reset Unit:1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0: Disable 

1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset 

� After clearing fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON, the 

drive can run after pressing RESET key. 

02-43 � Zero-speed Level of Motor Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 

VFPG FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: 0 

Settings 0~65535rpm 

� This parameter should be used with the multi-function output terminals (set to 43). 

� This parameter is used to set the level of motor zero-speed. When the actual speed is lower 

than this setting, the corresponding multi-function output terminal 43 will be ON as shown as 

follows. 

actual motor 

speed 

02-43 

MO=d43 

Time 




03-00 �Analog Input 1 (AVI) 

03-01 �Analog Input 2 (ACI) 

03-02 �Analog Input 3 (AUI) 




Settings 

VF 

Control Mode 


0: No function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control 

mode) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode) ○ 










12: Line speed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


14: PID target value of tension (tension closed-loop) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




� When it is frequency command or TQC speed limit, the corresponding value for 0~± 

10V/4~20mA is 0 – max. output frequency(Pr.01-00) 

� When it is torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – 

max. output torque (Pr.07-22). 

� When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – rated 

torque. 


03-00~02=9 

Regenerative 

torque limit 

03-00~02=10 

Positive/negative torque limit 

Reverse 

03-00~02=10 

Positive/negative torque limit 

03-00~02=8 

Negative torque limit 

Positive torque 

Negative Torque 


03-00~02=7 

Positive torque limit 

Forward 

03-00~02=9 

Regenerative 

torque limit 

03-03 �Analog Input Bias 1 (AVI) Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings -100.0~100.0% 

� It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0. 

03-04 �Analog Input Bias 1 (ACI) Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings -100.0~100.0% 

� It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0. 

03-05 �Analog Input Bias 1 (AUI) Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings -100.0~100.0% 

� It is used to set the corresponding AUI voltage of the external analog input 0. 

03-06 � Positive/negative Bias Mode (AVI) 

03-07 � Positive/negative Bias Mode (ACI) 

03-08 � Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI) 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Zero bias 

1 Lower than bias=bias 

2 Greater than bias=bias 



3 The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center 

4 Serve bias as the center 

� In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is 

recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency. 

03-00 

to 

03-02 

-10V-9 -8 -7-6 

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 

2 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10V 

Negative bias 

bias 

2 

4 

4 

bias 

Positive bias 

4 

03-09~03-11 gain is positive 

0 Zero bias 

1 Lower than bias =bias 

2 Greater than bias=bias 

The absolute value of the bias voltage 

3 

while s erving as the c enter 

4 Serve bias as the center 

03-09 � Analog Input Gain 1 (AVI) Unit: 1 

03-10 � Analog Input Gain 1 (ACI) Unit: 1 

03-11 � Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings -500.0~500.0% 

� Parameters 03-03 to 03-11 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog 

voltage/current signal. 

03-12 � ACI/AVI2 Selection 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 ACI 

1 AVI 2 

� There are two AVI analog inputs can be used when this parameter is set to 1 and the SW2 on 

the control board is set to AVI2. At this moment, ACI is for voltage input. 

03-13 � Analog Input Delay Time (AVI) Unit: 0.01 

03-14 � Analog Input Delay Time (ACI) Unit: 0.01 

03-15 � Analog Input Delay Time (AUI) Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.00 to 2.00 sec 


� These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signal. 

03-16 � Addition Function of the Analog Input 

Control 

mode 



Settings 0 Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI) 

1 Enable 

� When Pr.03-16 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI 

and AUI are AVI>ACI>AUI. 

Frequency 

03-17 � Loss of the ACI Signal 

Control 

mode 

Voltage 

Fcommand=[(ay bias)*gain]* Fmax(01-00) 

10V or 16mA 

Fcommand: the corresponding 

frequency for 10V or 20mA 

ay : 10 or 16mA 

bias : Pr.03-03,Pr. 03-04, Pr.03-05 

gain : Pr.03-09, Pr.03-10, Pr.03-11 



1 Continue operation at the last frequency 

2 Decelerate to stop 

3 Stop immediately and display E.F. 

� This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost. 

03-18 � Analog Output 1 Unit: 1 

03-21 � Analog Output 2 (need to be used with EMV-APP01) Unit: 1 

03-24 � Analog Output 3 (need to be used with EMV-APP01) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 to 19 


0 Output frequency (Hz) Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%. 




1 

Frequency command 

(Hz) 

Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%. 

2 Motor speed (Hz) 600Hz is regarded as 100% 

3 Output current (rms) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100% 

4 Output voltage (2 X rated voltage) is regarded as 100% 

5 DC Bus Voltage 450V (900V)=100% 

6 Power factor -1.000~1.000=100% 

7 Power Rated power is regarded as 100% 

8 Output torque Full-load torque is regarded as 100% 

9 AVI 0~10V=0~100% 

10 ACI 0~20mA=0~100% 

11 AUI -10~10V=0~100% 

12 q-axis current (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100% 

13 q-axis feedback value (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100% 

14 d-axis current 

15 d-axis feedback value 

16 q-axis voltage 250V (500V) =100% 

17 d-axis voltage 250V (500V) =100% 

(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100% 

(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100% 

18 Torque command Rated torque is regarded as 100% 

19 

Pulse frequency 

command 

Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%. 



03-19 � Gain for Analog Output 1 Unit: 0.1 

03-22 

03-25 

Control 

mode 

� Gain for Analog Output 2 (need to be used with EMV- 

APP01) 

� Gain for Analog Output 3 (need to be used with EMV- 

APP01) 

Unit: 0.1 

Unit: 0.1 


Settings 0 to 200.0% 

� It is used to adjust the analog voltage level that terminal AFM outputs. 

� This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0. 

03-20 � Analog Output 1 Value in REV Direction 



Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Absolute value in REV direction 

03-20=0 

03-23=0 

03-26=0 

1 Output 0V in REV direction 

2 Enable output voltage in REV direction 

10V(20mA) 

0V 

(0mA) 

03-18 

03-21 

03-24 

03-20=1 

03-23=1 

03-26=1 

10V(20mA) 

0V Frequency 

(0mA) 

Selections for the analog output direction 

03-20=2 

03-23=2 

03-26=2 

10V(20mA) 

5V Frequency 

(12mA) 



Group 4 Multi-Step Speed Parameters 

04-00 �1st Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 

04-01 �2nd Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 

04-02 �3rd Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 

04-03 �4th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 












Control 

mode 


Settings 0.00 to 600.00 Hz 

04-15 �Multi-position 1 Unit: 1 
















Control 

mode 


VFPG FOCPG Factory setting: 0 


� Please refer to the explanation of Pr.02-00 to Pr.02-06. 

MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 

Pr.10-19 setting 0 0 0 0 Master frequency 

04-15 multi-position 1 0 0 0 1 04-00 1 st step speed frequency 

04-16 multi-position2 0 0 1 0 04-01 2 nd step speed frequency 

04-17 multi-position 3 0 0 1 1 04-02 3 rd step speed frequency 

04-18 multi-position 4 0 1 0 0 04-03 4 th step speed frequency 















05-00 Motor Auto Tuning 

Control 

mode 

SVC Factory setting: 0 

Settings 0 No function 

1 Rolling test 

2 Static Test 

3 Reserved 

� Starting auto tuning by pressing RUN key and it will write the measure value into Pr.05-05 to 

Pr.05-09 for motor 1 and Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21 for motor 2. 

� The steps to AUTO-Tuning are: (when setting to 1) 

1. Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is 

correct. 

2. Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not 

3. 

connected to any belt or gear motor. It is recommended to set to 2 or 3 if the motor can’t 

separate from the load. 

Motor 1: fill in Pr.01-02, Pr.01-01, Pr.05-01, Pr.05-02, Pr.05-03 and Pr.05-04 with correct 

values. Refer to motor capacity to set accel./decel. time. 

Motor 2: fill in Pr.01-36, Pr.01-35, Pr.05-13, Pr.05-14, Pr.05-15 and Pr.05-16 with correct 

values. Refer to motor capacity to set accel./decel. time. 

4. When Pr.05-00 is set to 1, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after 

receiving a “RUN” command. (NOTE: the motor will run!) 

5. After executing, please check if there are values filled in Pr.05-05 to Pr.05-09 for motor 1 

and Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21 for motor 2. 

6. Mechanical equivalent circuit 

I 

Rs 

Lx 

V S 

Pr.05-06 

Pr.05-18 

Pr.05-09 

Pr.05-21 

Mechanical equivalent circuit for VE series 

Lm 

Pr.05-08 

Pr.05-20 

Rr 

Pr.05-07 

Pr.05-19 

� If Pr.05-00 is set to 2, it needs to input Pr.05-05 for motor 1/Pr.05-17 for motor 2. 


NOTE 


1. In torque/vector control mode, it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel. 

2. It is not recommended to use torque/vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the 

rated power of the AC motor drive. 

3. When auto-tuning 2 motors, it needs to set multi-function input terminals or change Pr.05-10 for 

motor 1/motor 2 selection. 

4. The no-load current is usually 20~50% X rated current. 

5. The rated speed can’t be larger or equal to 120f/p (f: rated frequency 01-01/01-35; P: number of 

motor poles 05-04/05-16). 

05-01 Full-load Current of Motor 1 Unit: Amp 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.## 

Settings 40 to 120% of drive’s rated current 


motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current. 

Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for 

setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10 and 25*120%=30) 

05-02 �Rated Power of Motor 1 (kW) Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.## 

Settings 0 to 655.35 kW 

� It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive. 

05-03 � Rated Speed of Motor 1 (rpm) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



Factory setting: 1710 (60Hz, 4 poles) 

1410 (50Hz, 4 poles) 

� It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated 


05-04 Number of Motor Poles 1 

Control 

mode 



� It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number). 



05-05 No-load Current of Motor 1 (A) Unit: Amp 

Control 

mode 

VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.## 

Settings 0 to factory setting of Pr.05-01 

� The factory setting is 40% X rated current. 

05-06 Stator Resistance(Rs) of Motor 1 Unit: 0.001 

05-07 Rotor Resistance(Rr) of Motor 1 Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 

SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.### 

Settings 0~65.535Ω 

05-08 Magnetizing Inductance(Lm) of Motor 1 Unit: 0.1 

05-09 Stator inductance(Lx) of Motor 1 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 

SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.# 

Settings 0~6553.5mH 

05-10 Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1 Motor 1 

2 Motor 2 

� It is used to set the motor that driven by the AC motor drive. 

05-11 � Frequency for Y-connection/ Δ−connection Switch Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



05-12 Y-connection /Δ−connection Switch 

Control 

mode 



1 Enable 

05-30 � Delay Time for Y-connection/Δ −connection Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 to 60.000 

� Pr.05-12 is used to enable/disable Y-connection/ Δ−connection Switch. 



� When Pr.05-12 is set to 1, the drive will select by Pr.05-11 setting and current motor frequency 

to switch motor to Y-connection or Δ−connection. �AT the same time, it will also affect motor 

parameters (Pr.05-01 to 05-10/Pr.05-13 to Pr.05-21). 

� Pr.05-30 is used to set the switch delay time of Y-connection/Δ −connection. 

� When output frequency reaches Y-connection/Δ −connection switch frequency, drive will delay 

by Pr.05-30 before multi-function output terminals are active. 

Y- connection switch: can be used for wide range motor 

Y connection for low speed: higher torque can be used for rigid tapping 

connection for high speed: higher torque can be used for high-speed drilling 

connection is finished 

U 

Pr.02-01~06=30 

MI1 V 

W 

Y-connection is finished connection control 

Pr.02-01~06=29 

MI2 

RA 

Pr.02-11~14=32 

Y connection control 

Pr.02-11~14=31 

MRA 

Pr.05-11 

Y- △ switch 

frequency 

Motor speed/ 

frequency 

Y-connection output 

Y-conenction 

confirmation input 

△-connection output 

Pr.02-11~14=32 

△-connection 


Pr.02-11~14=30 

Y-connection 


U V W 


IM 

X Y Z 

ON ON 

Pr.02-11~14=31 

ON 

If switch point is 60Hz, 

the accel. switch point is 62Hz 

In this area, motor is in free 

run status. AC motor drive 

stops outputting. 

Pr. 05-30 Delay Time for Y-connection 

/D -connection(Min. is 0.2 seconds) 

Pr.02-11~14=29 

ON 

ON 

ON 

:mechanical bounce time 

Decel. switch point is 58Hz 

Bandwidth is 2Hz 

Motor speed will 

decrease 

by load inertia.


output 

frequency 

Y-connection output 

Pr.02-11~14=31 

Y-connection 


Pr.02-01~06=29 

△-connection output 

Pr.02-11~14=32 

△-connection 


Pr.02-01~06=30 

Y- △ switch error 

frequency 

ON 

ON 

delay time 

Pr.05-30 


ON 

2 seconds 

free run status 

05-13 Full-load Current of Motor 2(A) Unit: Amp 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.## 

Settings 40 to 120% 


motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current. 

Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for 

setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10 and 25*120%=30) 

05-14 �Rated Power of Motor 2 (kW) Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.## 

Settings 0 to 655.35 

� It is used to set rated power of the motor 2. The factory setting is the power of the drive. 

05-15 � Rated Speed of Motor 2 (rpm) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 

VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: 1710 


� It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated 


ON

05-16 Number of Motor Poles 2 

Control 

mode 




� It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number). 

05-17 No-load Current of Motor 2 Unit: Amp 

Control 

mode 

VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.## 

Settings 0 to factory setting of Pr.05-01 

� The factory setting is 40% X rated current. 

05-18 Stator Resistance(Rs) of Motor 2 Unit: 0.001 

05-19 Rotor Resistance(Rr) of Motor 2 Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 

SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.### 

Settings 0~65.535Ω 

05-20 Magnetizing Inductance(Lm) of Motor 2 Unit: 0.1 

05-21 Stator Inductance (Lx) of Motor 2 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 

SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory setting: #.# 

Settings 0~6553.5mH 

05-22 � Torque Compensation Time Constant Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC Factory setting: 0.020 


05-23 � Slip Compensation Time Constant Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 

VFPG SVC Factory setting: 0.100 


� Setting Pr.05-22 and Pr.05-23 change the response time for the compensation. 

� When Pr.05-22 and Pr.05-23 are set to 10.00 seconds, its response time for the compensation 

will be the longest. But if the settings are too short, unstable system may occur. 

05-24 � Torque Compensation Gain Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG Factory setting: 0 



Settings 0 to10 

� This parameter may be set so that the AC motor drive will increase its voltage output to obtain 

a higher torque. Only to be used for SVC control mode. 

� Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor. 

05-25 � Slip Compensation Gain Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF SVC Factory setting: 0.00 

Settings 0.00 to10.00 

� When the asynchronous motor is driven by the drive, the load and slip will be increased. This 

parameter can be used to correct frequency compensation and lower the slip to make the 

motor can run near the synchronous speed under rated current. When the output current is 

larger than the motor no-load current, the drive will compensate the frequency by Pr.05-25 

setting. If the actual speed is slower than expectation, please increase the setting and vice 

versa. 

� It is only valid in SVC/VF mode. 

� The factory settings are: 

A. In SVC mode, the factory setting is 1.00. 

B. In VF mode, the factory setting is 0.00. 

05-26 � Slip Deviation Level Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 

VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory setting: 0 

Settings 0 to 1000% (0: disable) 

05-27 � Detection time of Slip Deviation Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 

VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory setting: 1.0 


05-28 �Over Slip Treatment 

Control 

mode 

VFPG SVC FOCPG Factory setting: 0 

Settings 0 Warn and keep operation 

1 Warn and ramp to stop 

2 Warn and coast to stop 

� Pr.05-26 to Pr.05-28 are used to set allowable slip level/time and over slip treatment when the 

drive is running. 



05-29 � Hunting Gain Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC Factory setting: 2000 

Settings 0 to 10000 (0: disable) 

� The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by 

setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, Pr.05-29 can be set to 0. 

when the current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.05-29.) 

05-31 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 00 to1439 

05-32 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� Pr. 05-31 and Pr.05-32 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by 

setting to 00 and time won’t be recorded when it is less than 60 seconds. 




06-00 �Low Voltage Level Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 230V series 160.0~220.0Vdc Factory Setting: 180.0 

� It is used to set the Lv level. 

460V series 320.0~440.0Vdc Factory Setting: 360.0 

Pr. 06-00 

input voltage 

LV 

30V(60V) 

06-01 �Over-Voltage Stall Prevention Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 




0.0: disable (when brake resistor used) 

� During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to 

motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate 

further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value 

again. 

output 

frequency 

previous 

deceleration time 

Deceleration characteristic 

when Over-Voltage Stall 

Prevention enabled 

Frequency Held 


time

06-02 �Phase-loss Protection 

Control 

mode 


VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 0 




� It is used to set the phase-loss treatment. The phase-loss will effect driver’s control 

characteristic and life. 

06-03 �Over-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC Factory Setting: 170 

Settings 00~250% (100%: drive’s rated current) 

� During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value 

specified by Pr.06-03 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this 

function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant 

until the current drops below the maximum value. 

06-03 

Over-Current 

Detection 

current 

Level 

Over-Current Stall 

prevention during 

Acceleration, 

frequency held 

Output 

Frequency 

actual acceleration time when over-current stall 

prevention is enabled 

06-04 �Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


time 


Settings 00 to 250% (100%: drive’s rated current) 

� If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-04 when the drive is operating, the 

drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower 

than the setting specified in Pr.06-04, the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set 

frequency command value.


Over-Current 

Detection Level 

06-04 



Operation, output 

frequency decrease 

Output Current 

Output 

Frequency 

Time 

over-current stall prevention during operation 

06-05 �Accel./Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 by current accel/decel. time 

1 by the 1 st accel/decel. time 

2 by the 2 nd accel/decel. time 

3 by the 3 rd accel/decel. time 

4 by the 4 th accel/decel. time 

5 by auto accel/decel. time 

� It is used to set the accel./decel. Time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant 

speed. 

06-06 �Over-torque Detection Selection (OT1) 

06-09 �Over-torque Detection Selection (OT2) 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Over-Torque detection disabled. 

1 Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to 


2 Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop 


3 Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after 

detection 

4 Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after 

detection 

� When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 1 or 3, it will display a warning message and won’t 

have a abnormal record. 



When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 2 or 4, it will display a warning message and will have 

a abnormal record. 

06-07 Over-torque Detection Level (OT1) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



06-08 Over-torque Detection Time (OT1) Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



06-10 Over-torque Detection Level (OT2) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



06-11 Over-torque Detection Time (OT2) Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 determine the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque is 

detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level 

(Pr.06-19) and also exceeds the Pr.06-08 Over-Torque Detection Time, the fault code 

“OT1/OT2” is displayed. If a Multi-Functional Output Terminal is to over-torque detection, the 

output is on. Please refer to Pr.02-11~02-14 for details. 

current 

Pr.06-08, 06-11 

5% Pr.06-07, 

Pr.06-10 

06-12 Current Limit Unit: 1 

Control 

mode FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 150 




� It is used to set the current limit. 

06-13 � Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1) 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Operate with a Inverter Motor (forced external cooling) 

1 Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan) 

2 Disabled 

06-27 � Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2) 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Operate with a Inverter Motor (forced external cooling) 

1 Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan) 

2 Disabled 

� It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electrical 

thermal relay to limit driver’s output power. 

06-14 �Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 1 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



06-28 �Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 2 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� The parameter is set by the 150% of motor rated current and the setting of Pr.06-14 and Pr.06- 

28 to prevent the motor damaged from overheating. When it reaches the setting, it will display 

“EoL1/EoL2” and the motor will be in free running. 

Operation 

time(min) 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

60Hz or more 

50Hz 

10Hz 

5Hz 

0 20 40 60 80100120140160180200 

Load 

factor (%) 



06-15 � Heat Sink Over-heat (OH) Warning Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0 to 110.0 o C 

06-16 � Stall Prevention Limit Level Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 to 100% (refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04) 

� When operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01, Pr06-03=150%, Pr. 06-04=100% and Pr. 

06-16=80%: 

Stall Prevention Level during acceleration = 06-03x06-16=150x80%=120%. 

Stall Prevention Level at constant speed= 06-04x06-16=100x80%=80%. 

06-17 Present Fault Record 

06-18 Second Most Recent Fault Record 

06-19 Third Most Recent Fault Record 

06-20 Fourth Recent Fault Record 

06-21 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record 

06-22 Sixth Most Recent Fault Record 

Settings 0 to 65 Factory Setting: 0 

Settings 

VF 

Control Mode 


0: No fault ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

6: Over-curent at stop (ocS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 



12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

15: Phase loss (PHL) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 

18: TH1: IGBT hardware failure (tH1o) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 




Settings 

VF 

Control Mode 



21: over-load (oL) (when it exceeds 150% rated current, 

1 min later it will be overload) 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 





26: over-torque 1 (ot1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


28: Reserved 

29: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 


















47: PG ref loss (PGr2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 






53: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 






59: PU time-out (cP10) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 







� It will record when the fault occurs and force stopping. For the Lv, it will record when it is 

operation, or it will warn without record. 



� Setting 62: when DEB function is enabled, the drive will execute DEB and record to the Pr.06- 

17 to Pr.06-22 simultaneously. 

06-23 � Fault Output Option 1 Unit: 1 




Control 

mode 


Settings 0 to 65535 sec (refer to bit table for fault code) 

� These parameters can be used with multi-function output (set Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 to 35-38) 

for the specific requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be 

activated (It needs to convert binary value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-23 to Pr.06-26). 

0: No fault 

Fault code 

1: Over-current during acceleration 

(ocA) 

2: Over-current during deceleration 

(ocd) 

3: Over-current during constant 

speed (ocn) 

Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 

current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE 

● 

● 

● 

4: Ground fault (GFF) ● 

5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) ● 

6: Over-curent at stop (ocS) ● 

7: Over-voltage during acceleration 

(ovA) 

8: Over-voltage during deceleration 

(ovd) 

9: Over-voltage during constant 

speed (ovn) 

10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) ● 

11: Low-voltage during 

acceleration (LvA) 

12: Low-voltage during 

deceleration (Lvd) 


● 

● 

● 

● 

●


Fault code 

13: Low-voltage during constant 

speed (Lvn) 

14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS) ● 



15: Phase loss (PHL) ● 

16: IGBT over-heat (oH1) ● 

17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 

40HP above) 

18: TH1: IGBT hardware failure 

(tH1o) 

19: TH2: Heat sink hardware 

failure(tH2o) 

20: Fan error signal output ● 

21: over-load (oL) (when it exceeds 

150% rated current, 1 min later it 

will be overload) 

22: Electronics thermal relay 1 

(EoL1) 

23: Electronics thermal relay 2 

(EoL2) 

24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) ● 

25: Fuse error (FuSE) ● 

26: over-torque 1 (ot1) ● 

27: over-torque 1 (ot2) ● 

28: Reserved 

29: Reserved 

30: Memory write-in error (cF1) ● 

31: Memory read-out error (cF2) ● 

32: Isum current detection error 

(cd0) 

33: U-phase current detection error 

(cd1) 

34: V-phase current detection error 

(cd2) 


● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

●

Fault code 

35: W-phase current detection 

error (cd3) 

36: Clamp current detection error 

(Hd0) 

37: Over-current detection error 

(Hd1) 

38: Over-voltage detection error 

(Hd2) 

39: Ground current detection error 

(Hd3) 




40: Auto tuning error (AuE) ● 

41: PID feedback loss (AFE) ● 

42: PG feedback error (PGF1) ● 

43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) ● 

44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) ● 

45: PG slip error (PGF4) ● 

46: PG ref input error (PGr1) ● 

47: PG ref loss (PGr2) ● 

48: Analog current input loss 

(ACE) 

49: External fault input (EF) ● 

50: Emergency stop (EF1) ● 

51: External Base Block (B.B.) ● 

52: Password error (PcodE) ● 

53: Reserved 

54: Communication error (cE1) ● 




58: Communication Time-out 

(cE10) 


● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

●


Fault code 



59: PU time-out (cP10) ● 

60: Brake transistor error (bF) ● 

61: Y-connection/Δ-connection 

switch error (ydc) 

62: Decel. Energy Backup Error 

(dEb) 

63: Slip error (oSL) ● 

64: Broken belt error (bEb) ● 

65: Error PID feedback signal of 

tension (tdEv) 

06-29 � PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Selection 

Control 

mode 


● 


Settings 0 Warn and keep operating 



� It is used to set the treatment after detecting PTC. 

06-30 �PTC Level Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0 to 100.0% 

� It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input 

value. 

06-31 � Filter Time for PTC Detection Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



06-32 Output Frequency for Malfunction 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: Read-only 


● 

●

06-33 Output Voltage for Malfunction 

Control 

mode 



Settings 0.0~6553.5 V 

06-34 DC Voltage for Malfunction 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0~6553.5 V 

06-35 Output Current for Malfunction 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.00~655.35 Amp 

06-36 IGBT Temperature for Malfunction 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0~6553.5 °C 




07-00 � Software Brake Level Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 




� This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. 

07-01 � DC Brake Current Level Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and 

stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00-01) is regarded as 100%. 

It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper 

holding torque has been attained. 

� When it is in FOCPG/TQCPG mode, DC brake is zero-speed operation. It can enable DC 

brake function by setting to any value. 

07-02 � DC Brake Time at Start-up Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When 

the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency 

(Pr.01-05). 

07-03 � DC Brake Time at Stop Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. 

07-04 � Start-Point for DC Brake Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

VF VFPG SVC TQCPG Factory Setting: 0.00 


� This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. 


Run/Stop 

Output frequency 

01-09 

Minimum 

output 

frequency 

ON 

Start-point for 

DC braking 

time during 

stopping 

DC Braking Time 


DC Braking Time 

during Stopping 

� DC Brake at Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans 

and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position 

before setting it in motion. 

� DC Brake at stop is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in 

position. For high inertia loads, a dynamic brake resistor may also be needed for fast 

decelerations. 

07-05 �Proportional Gain for DC Brake Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1 to 500Hz 

� It is used to set the output voltage gain when DC brake. 

07-06 � Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Operation stops after momentary power loss. 

1 Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search 

starts with the Master Frequency reference value. 

2 Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search 

starts with the minimum frequency. 

� This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a 

momentary power loss. 

� In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically 

by the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0. 

07-07 �Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 




OFF 

Time


� If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will 

resume operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive 

output is then turned off (coast stop). 

� The selected operation after power loss in Pr.07-06 is only executed when the maximum 

allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”. 

But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power 

loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.07-06 is not executed. In that case it 

starts up normally. 

07-08 �Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB) Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� When momentary power loss is detected, the AC drive will block its output and then wait for a 

specified period of time (determined by Pr.07-08, called Base-Block Time) before resuming 

operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration 

voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again. 

7 

Output frequency(H) 

Output voltage(V) 

Output current A 

07-09 

Current Limit for 

Speed Search 

FWD Run 

B.B. 

Input B.B. signal 

Stop output voltage 

Disable B.B. signal 

Waiting time Pr.07-08 

Speed search 

Synchronization speed detection 

7 Frequency command before B.B. 

Time 

B.B. Search with last output frequency downward timing chart 



(H) 

Output voltage 

(V) 

output current A 

07-09 Current Limit 

for Speed Search Speed 

Output frequency(H) 

Output voltage(V) 

FWD Run 

Output current A 

06-03 


Prevention 

during Accel. 

FWD Run 

B.B. 



Time 

B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart 

B.B. 

Time 

B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart 


Stop output voltage 


Waiting time 08.07 

Speed Search 



Stop voltage output 


Waiting time Pr.07-08 

Speed search 


07-09 �Current Limit for Speed Search Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation 

only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.8-07. When the output current is 

less than the value of Pr.8-07, the AC motor drive output frequency is at “speed 

synchronization point”. The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating 

frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss. 

� When executing speed search, the V/f curve is operated by group 1 setting. The maximum 

current for the optimum accel./decel. and start speed search is set by Pr.07-09.


07-10 �Base Block Speed Search 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Stop operation 

1 Speed search starts with last frequency command 

2 Speed search starts with minimum output frequency 

� This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is 

enabled. 



07-11 �Auto Restart After Fault Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be 

reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times. 

� Setting this parameter to 0 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred. 

When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency 

before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 07-08 Base 

Block Time for Speed Search. 

07-12 � Speed Search during Start-up 

Control 

mode 



1 Speed search from maximum frequency 

2 Speed search from start-up frequency 

3 Speed search from minimum frequency 

� This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with high inertia. A motor with high 

inertia will take a long time to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does not 

need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a 

PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the 

speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the commanded frequency. 

The output current is set by the Pr.07-09. 





07-13 � Decel. Time Selection for Momentary Power Loss (DEB function) 

Control 

mode 



1 1st decel. time 

2 2nd decel. time 

3 3rd decel. time 

4 4th decel. time 

5 Current decel. time 

6 Auto decel. time 

� This parameter is used for the decel. time selection for momentary power loss. 

07-14 � DEB Return Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� The DEB (Deceleration Energy Backup) function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop 

after momentary power loss. When the momentary power loss occurs, this function can be 

used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method. When the power is 

on again, motor will run again after DEB return time. 

� Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low 

voltage)/sudden heavy-load 

DC BUS voltage 

The level for DEB return time 

(Lv=+30V+58V) 

The level for soft start relay to be ON 

(Lv+30) 

Lv level 

Soft start relay at 

power side 

DEB function is activated 


Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for 

momentary power loss 

it doesn't need 

multi-function terminals 

07-14 

DEB return time 

NOTE 

When Pr.07-14 is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be stopped and won't re-start 

at the power-on again. 



� Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss 

DC BUS voltage 

The level for DEB return time 

(Lv=+30V+58V) 

The level for soft start relay to be ON 

(Lv+30) 

Lv level 

NOTE 

Soft start relay at 

power side 

DEB function is activated 


Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for 

momentary power loss 

DEB return time 

07-14 

For example, in textile machinery, you will hope that all the machines can be decelerated to stop to 

prevent broken stitching when power loss. In this case, the host controller will send a message to the 

AC motor drive to use DEB function with deceleration time via EF. 

07-15 � Dwell Time at Accel. Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



07-16 � Dwell Frequency at Accel. Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



07-17 � Dwell Time at Decel. Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



07-18 � Dwell Frequency at Decel. Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily. 

� Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18 is for heavy load to prevent OV or OC occurs. 


Frequency 

07-16 

Dwell 

Frequency 

at Accel. 

07-19 � Fan Control 

Control 

mode 

07-15 

Dwell Time 

at Accel. 

Dwell at accel./decel. 

07-17 

Dwell Time 

at Decel. 


07-18 

Dwell 

Frequency 

at Decel. 

Time 


Settings 0 Fan always ON 

1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF 

2 AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive stops and fan OFF 

3 Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink temperature (around 

60 o C) attained 

4 Fan always OFF 

� This parameter is used for the fan control. 

07-20 � Torque Command Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode TQCPG Factory Setting: 0.0 

Settings -100.0 to 100.0% 

(Pr. 07-22 setting=100%) 

� This parameter is torque command. When Pr.07-22 is 250% and Pr.07-20 is 100%, the actual 

torque command = 250%X100% X motor rated torque. 

� The drive will record the setting before power off. 

07-21 � Torque Command Source 

Control 

mode TQCPG Factory Setting: 0 

Settings 0 Digital keypad 

1 RS485 serial communication (RJ-11) 

2 Analog signal (Pr.03-00) 

� When Pr.07-21 is set to 0, the torque command can be set in Pr.07-20. 



� When Pr.07-21 is set to 1 or 2, Pr.07-20 is used to display torque command. 

07-22 � Maximum Torque Command Unit: 1 

Control 



� This parameter is for the max. torque command (motor rated torque is 100%). 

� According to the formula of motor rated torque: 

P( 

ω) 

, where P(ω) is Pr.05- 

T ( N. 

M ) = 

W ( rad / s) 

RPM 

60× 

2π 

02 and W(rad/s) is Pr.05-03. = rad / s 

07-23 � Filter Time of Torque Command Unit: 0.001 

Control 



� When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. 

When the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable. 

User can adjust the setting by the control and response situation. 

07-24 Speed Limit Selection 

Control 


Settings 0 By Pr.07-25 and Pr.07-26 

1 Frequency command source (Pr.00-20) 

� The function of speed limit: In the torque control mode (TQCPG), when the torque command is 

larger than the load, it will be changed to speed control mode while the motor speed is 

accelerated to speed limit setting (Pr.07-24, Pr.07-25 and Pr.07-26) to prevent the motor from 

continuous acceleration. 


torque 

motor 

speed 

07-25 

torque 

motor 

speed 

00-20 

07-26 

07-26 

Pr.07-24=0 

Pr.07-24=1 

Running/opposite running When i t is for ward r unni ng, 

direction are 

the running direction is limited 

limited by Pr.07-25 by Pr.00-20 and the 

and Pr.07-26. 

opposite running direction 

is limited by Pr.07-26. 


torque 

motor 

speed 

07-25 

00-20 

Pr.07-24=1 

When it is reverse running, 

the running direction is limited 

by Pr.07-25 and the 

opposite running direction 

is limited by Pr.00-20. 

07-25 � Torque Mode +Speed Limit Unit: 1 

07-26 � Torque Mode-Speed Limit Unit: 1 

Control 



� These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite 

direction. (Pr.01-00 max. output frequency=100%) 

07-27 Source of Torque Offset 

Control 

mode 

SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 0 


1 Analog input (Pr.03-00) 

2 Torque offset setting 

3 Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31) 

� This parameter is the source of torque offset. 

� When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will decide to Pr.07-29, Pr.07-30 and Pr.07-31 

by the multi-function input terminals(MI) setting (31, 32 or 33). 

MI is set to 31 MI is set to 32 MI is set to 33 Torque offset 

OFF OFF OFF None 

OFF OFF ON 07-31 

OFF ON OFF 07-30 

OFF ON ON 07-31+07-30 

ON OFF OFF 07-29 



MI is set to 31 MI is set to 32 MI is set to 33 Torque offset 

ON OFF ON 07-29+07-31 

ON ON OFF 07-29+07-30 

ON ON ON 07-29+07-30+07-31 

07-28 � Torque Offset Setting Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 

SVC FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 0.0 


� This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%. 


P( 

ω) 


T ( N. 

M ) = 

W ( rad / s) 

RPM 

60× 

2π 


07-29 � High Torque Offset Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



07-30 � Middle Torque Offset Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



07-31 � Low Torque Offset Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will decide to Pr.07-29, Pr.07-30 and Pr.07-31 

by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is 100%. 


P( 

ω) 


T ( N. 

M ) = 

W ( rad / s) 

RPM 

60× 

2π 


07-32 � Forward Motor Torque Limit Unit: 1 

07-33 � Forward Regenerative Torque Limit Unit: 1 



07-34 � Reverse Motor Torque Limit Unit: 1 

07-35 � Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Unit: 1 

Control 



� The motor rated torque is 100%. The settings for Pr.07-32 to Pr.07-35 will compare with Pr.03- 

00=7, 8, 9, 10. The minimum of the comparison result will be torque limit as shown in the 

following figure. 


P( 

ω) 


T ( N. 

M ) = 

W ( rad / s) 

RPM 

60× 

2π 


Reverse refenerative mode 

06-12 current limit 

Positive 

torque 

External analog terminals 

Pr.03-00~02 

7: positive torque limit 

10: positive/negative torque limit 

9: regenerative torque limit 

Pr.07-35 

Reverse regenerative 

torque limit 

Pr.07-34 

Reverse motor 

torque limit 

Quadrant II Quadrant I 

Quadrant III Quadrant IV 


Pr.03-00~03-02 

8: negative torque limit 


Forward motor mode 

06-12 current limit 


Pr.03-00~02 

7: positive torque limit 


Pr.07-32 

Forward motor 

torque limit 

Pr.07-33 

Forward regenerative 

torque limit 


Pr.03-00~03-02 

8: negative torque limit 


06-12 current limit 06-12 current limit 

Reverse motor mode Negative 

torque 

Forward regenerative mode 

07-36 Emergency Stop (EF) & Forced Stop Selection 

Control 

mode 

The level of torque limit will be 

the min. valu e of following thre e values 

1. torque limit of Pr.07-32 to Pr.07-35 

2. Torque limit of external analog terminals 

(AVI, ACI and AUI) 

3. Pr.06-12 current limit 



Settings 0 Coast stop 

1 By deceleration Time 1 






5 System Deceleration 

6 Automatic Deceleration 

� When the multi-function input terminal is set to 10 or 18 and it is ON, the AC motor drive will be 

operated by Pr.07-36. 



08-00 Input Terminal for PID Feedback 

Control 

mode 



Settings 0 No function 

1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00) 

2 Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction) 

3 Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15) 

4 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00) 

5 Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction) 

6 Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15) 

� Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback. It is used for the detection value will be 

increased by increasing the output frequency. 

� Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. It is used for the detection value will be 

decreased by increasing the output frequency. 

08-01 � Proportional Gain (P) Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter determinates the gain of the feedback loop. If the gain is large, the response 

will be strong and immediate (if the gain is too large, vibration may occur). If the gain is small, 

the response will weak and slow. 

08-02 � Integral Gain (I) Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter determines the speed of response for the PID feedback loop. If the integral 

time is long, the response will be slow. If the integral time is short, the response will be quick. 

Be careful not to set(I) too small, since a rapid response may cause oscillation in the PID loop. 

� If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr.08-02 will be disabled. 



08-03 � Derivative Control (D) Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter determines the damping effect for the PID feedback loop. If the differential time 

is long, any oscillation will quickly subside. If the differential time is short, the oscillation will 

subside slowly. 

08-04 � Upper limit for Integral Control Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the 

Master Frequency. 

The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) x (Pr.08-04). 

08-05 � PID Output Frequency Limit Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The 

formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.08-05 %. 

This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency. 

08-06 � PID Offset Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings -100.0 to 100.0% 

08-07 � PID Delay Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 




Inp ut Selection of the 

PID Targe ted Value 

00-20:KPV-CE0 1/ 

RS485 

03-00~0 2: UP/D own 

ke y PG 

Display of th e PID fee dback 

00-14=1 0 display o f t he 

PID feed back 

Inp ut Selection 

of the PID Fee dback 

08-00:AVI/ACI 

AUI /PG 

+ 

PID Cancelled 

08-00=0 

or 02-01~06=21(pid off) 

1 

2 

P 

Proportion 

ga in 

08-01 

I 

Differential 

Time 

08-03 


08-09 

Treatme nt o f t he 

Feedback Signal Fau lt 

If Hz>08 -05 

time exce eds 08-08 

08-05 

PID Freq. 

out put 

command 

limit 


D 

- + 

08-02 

Integral Time 08-04 

uppe r limit 

for 

Int egral 

+ 

PID offset 

08-06 

PID 

Delay 

Time 

08-07 

Frequ ency 

command 

� PI Control: controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated 

entirely. To eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when 

the PI control is utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes 

and the constant external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will 

delay the responding toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the 

loading system that possesses the integral components. 

� PD Control: when deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation 

load that is greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the 

increment of the deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be 

decreasing as well. The control objects include occasions with integral component loads, 

which are controlled by the P action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is 

functioning, the whole system will be vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P 

action’s vibration subsiding and the system stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In 

other words, this control is good for use with loadings with no brake functions over the 

processes. 

� PID Control: Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the 

vibration, thereafter, combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID 

method could obtain a control process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system. 

+


08-08 � Feedback Signal Detection Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter is only valid when the feedback signal is ACI. 

� This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a 

warning is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time. 

� If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal. 

08-09 Feedback Fault Treatment 

Control 

mode 



1 Warn and RAMP to stop 

2 Warn and COAST to stop 

3 Warn and keep at last frequency 

� This parameter is only valid when the feedback signal is ACI. 

� AC motor drive acts when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder) 

feedback) are abnormal. 

08-10 � Sleep Frequency Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



08-11 � Wake-up Frequency Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



08-12 � Sleep Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0 to 6000.0sec 

� These parameters determine sleep functions of the AC drive. If the command frequency falls 

below the sleep frequency, for the specified time in Pr. 08-12, then the drive will shut off the 

output and wait until the command frequency rises above Pr. 08-11. Please see the below 

diagram. 


08-11 

Wake-up frequency 

08-10 

Sleep frequency 

Frequency command 

sleep time 

08-12 

actual output frequency 

Sleep Function 


08-13 � PID Deviation Level Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



08-14 � PID Deviation Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



08-15 � Filter Time for PID Feedback Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 








08-21 Tension Control Selection 

Settings 0 to 4 Factory Setting: 0 

Settings 

VF 

Control Mode 


0: Disable 

1: Tension closed-loop, speed mode ○ ○ ○ ○ 


3: Reserved 

○ ○ ○ ○ 


� Tension closed-loop, speed mode 


0Hz


� The calculation of the master frequency of the tension control 

Master frequency (Hz)= V 

D *A 

B 

V: line speed m/min 

D: Reel diameter m 

A 

: Mechanical gear ratio 

B 

tension command 

08-25 

& 

08-26 

+ PI 

- 

08-29 & 08-30 

tension 08-32 & 08-33 

feedback 

08-27=0 

08-23 & 08-24 

mechanical gear ratio 

reel diameter 

line speed 

pitch 

roller 

Motor 

Limit 

PID output frequency 

08-35=0 *1 

+ 

08-35=1 *-1 


+ 

master frequency 

A B 

Gear ratio 

A:B 

Motor 

frequency 

command 

tension feedback 

AFM or DFM 

line speed input 

AI 

AI or PG2 

operation command 

operation MO=d1 

FWD 

command FWD 

tension command AI/communication/ 

frequency 

digital keypad 

setting 

AI 

sourc e of r eel diameter 

08-42 

Drive 1 Drive 2 

� Line speed closed-loop, speed mode


PID output frequency 

Line speed command 

08-35=0 *1 

+ 

+ frequency 

08-25=2, 08-26 

PI 

command 

- 

+ 

08-29~08-30 08-36 08-35=1 *-1 

08-32~08-33 

line speed feedback 

08-27=1 

08-23 or 08-24 

mechanical gear A or B 

Encoder 

� Tension open-loop, torque mode 

Torque (N-M) = F * D 

2 

F: tension (N) 

D: reel diameter (m) 

08-42 

reel diameter 

08-25=2,08-26 

line speed command 

08-27=1 


A B 

Gear ratio 

A:B 

08-27=1 


line speed command 

sourc e of reel diameter 

master frequency 

PG2 

08-42 

Motor 

AI or 

communication 

drive 



tension 

setting 

tension 

08-76/08-79 08-81 + + 

taper torque value 

08-22 Wind Mode 

Control 

mode 

reel diameter 

08-42 

08-42 

reel diameter 

calc ul ation 

A B 

Gear ratio 

A:B 

tension c omm and 

operation command 

direction of torque command 

sourc e of reel diameter 

torque 

compensation 

08-83~08-86 

torque 

FWD 

MI=d39 

torque 

command 


AI 

08-42 

Motor 

PG1 

Drive 

TQCPG mode 


Settings 0 Rewind 

1 Unwind 

� When it is set to 0, the reel diameter (D) will increase. When it is set to 1, the reel diameter will 

decrease as shown in the following diagram.

ewind unwind 


08-23 � Mechanical Gear A at Reel Unit: 1 

08-24 � Mechanical Gear B at Motor Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� Pr.08-23 and Pr.08-24 are only for tension control mode. 

applied in tension control mode 

rewind/unwind 

reel 

Gear A Gear B 

Gear ratio A:B 

08-25 Source of the Tension Command/Line Speed 

Control 

mode 

Drive 

Motor 


Settings 0 Parameter setting (Pr.08-26) 

1 RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-26) 

2 Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02=14 PID target value of tension, 03- 

00~03-02=12 line speed) 

� When it is set to 0, it can adjust Pr.08-26 setting (PID Target Value of Tension/Line Speed) by 

the digital keypad. 

� When it is set to 1, it can adjust Pr.08-26 setting (PID Target Value of Tension/Line Speed) by 

the communication 

� When it is set to 2, the source of tension command is the external analog input terminals 

(Pr.03-00~03-02). When Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to 14 (PID target value of tension), Pr.08-26 

will display the PID target value of tension. 

� When it is set to 2, the source of tension command is the external analog input terminals 

(Pr.03-00~03-02). When Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to 12 (line speed), Pr.08-26 will display the PID 

target value of line speed. 



08-26 � PID Target Value of Tension/Line Speed Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� The setting range 0.0 to 100.0% corresponds to tension feedback 0~10V/0~max. line speed 

(Pr.08-38). 

� Example: 

In tension mode, when Pr.08-21 is set to 1 (Tension closed-loop, speed mode), the setting 14 

of Pr.03-00~03-02 (PID target value of tension) corresponds to tension feedback 0~10V. 

In tension mode, when Pr.08-21 is set to 2 (Line speed closed-loop, speed mode), the setting 

12 of Pr.03-00~03-02 (line speed) corresponds to 0~max. line speed (Pr. 08-38). 

08-27 Source of Tension/Line Speed PID Feedback 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID feedback of tension) 

1 Pulse input (Pr.08-40) 

08-28 Auto-tuning Tension PID 

Control 

mode 



1 Reel diameter (08-29~08-30 corresponds to 08-44, 08-32~08-33 

corresponds to 08-43) 

2 Frequency (08-29~08-30 corresponds to 01-07, 08-32~08-33 

corresponds to 01-00) 

� When Pr.08-28 is set to 1: 

P.I.D 

08-29 

08-30 

08-32 

08-33 

0 

Dmin 

Dmax 

08-44 08-43 

reel 

diameter 


� When Pr.08-28 is set to 2: 

P.I.D 

08-29 

08-30 

08-32 

08-33 

0 Fmin 

Fmax 

01-07 01-00 


output 

frequency 

08-29 � Proportional Gain 1 of Tension PID P Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0 to 1000.0 

08-30 � Integral Time of Tension PID I Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 




08-32 � Proportional Gain 2 of Tension PID P Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



08-33 � Integral Time 2 of Tension PID I Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 






08-35 PID Output Status 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Positive output 

1 Negative output 

� Please select the applicable method by the different requirements from the following table. 

Tens ion feedback 

Rewind 

Unwind 

0 ~ 100% 0 ~ 100% 

loose tight tight loose 

positive output negative output 

negativ e output 

positive output 

08-36 Tension/Line Speed PID Output Limit Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 to 100.00% 

� Output limit range=Pr.08-36 * Pr.01-00. 

08-37 Source of Line Speed Input Command 

Control 

mode 



1 Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed) 

2 RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-41) 

3 Pulse input (Pr.08-40) 

4 DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18) 

� When it is set to 1, 3 or 4, the current line speed will be saved into Pr.08-41 via analog and 

pulse command. When it is set to 2, it can change the setting of Pr.08-41 (current line speed) 

via communication. 

� When it is set to 3 or 4, pulse signal needs to be connected to PG2 of the PG card and then 

set the PG type by Pr.10-15. 

� When it is set to 3, it needs to use with Pr.08-40. 

� When it is set to 4, Pr.02-18 setting needs to be set to the DFM output value of previous driver 

as shown in the following before setting Pr.08-38. 


TP 

DFM 

pitch roller 

DFM 

(02-18) 

DCM 

A2 

/A2 

B2 

/B2 

DCM 

Wind 

motor motor 

Driver 1 Driver 2 

PG 2 


the setting of Pr,02-18 of motor 2 

= the setting of Pr.02-18 of motor 1 

Pr.10-15 of motor 2 

should be set to 3 or 4 

08-38 Max. Line Speed Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


TP 

AB2 


Settings 0.0 to 3000.0 m/min 

In tension closed-loop and open-loop mode, the max. line speed is the reel line speed of the 

pitch roller that corresponds to the max. frequency. 

In closed-loop of line speed, setting by the mechanism requirement. 

08-39 Min. Line Speed Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



When the line speed setting is lower than PR.08-39, the drive will stop calculating the reel 

diameter. 

08-40 Pulse Number for Each Meter Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0 to 6000.0 pulse/m


� When Pr.08-37 is set to 3, it needs to be used with this parameter. 

08-41 Current Line Speed Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� The display range of this parameter is according to Pr.08-38 and Pr.08-39. 

� When Pr.08-37 is set to 1, 3, or 4, the current line speed will be saved into Pr.08-41 via analog 

and pulse command. At this time, Pr.08-41 will be read only. 

� When Pr.08-37 is set to 2, the setting of Pr.08-41(current line speed) can be changed by 

communication. 

08-42 Source of Reel Diameter 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Calculated by line speed 

1 Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on reel shaft)(Pr.08- 

49~51, Pr.10-15) 

2 Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on motor)(Pr.08- 

23~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 10-00~10-01) 

3 Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to 13) 

� When it is set to 1 or 2, it needs to be used with PG card. 

� When it is set to 1, the reel diameter can be got from the encoder on the reel shaft. At this time, 

the pulse signal needs to be connected to the PG2 of PG card and get the reel diameter from 

the settings of Pr.10-15, Pr.08-49, Pr.08-50 and Pr.08-51. 

� When it is set to 2, the reel diameter can be calculated from the motor encoder and gear ratio. 

� 

At this time, the pulse signal should be connected to the PG1 of the PG card and get the reel 

diameter from the settings of Pr.08-23, Pr.08-24, Pr.10-01, Pr.10-00, Pr.08-50 and Pr.08-51. 

When it is set to 3, the reel diameter can be calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set 

to 13) and the corresponding value of 10V is Pr.08-43. 

the path when 

Pr.08-42 is set to 1 

proximity 

switch/ 

encoder 

Driver 

the path when 

Pr.08-42 is set to 2 

� Definition of reel diameter 

gear ratio Motor 

Encoder 


D 

C 

B 

A. 08-44 Empty reel diameter 

B. 08-46/47/48 Initial reel diameter 

C. 08-54 Current reel diameter 

D. 08-43 Max. reel diameter 

A 

08-50 Coil number 

for eac h layer 

infeed direction 


08-51 

Material Thickness 

08-43 � Max. Reel Diameter Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1.0 to 6000.0mm 

08-44 � Empty Reel Diameter Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1 to 6000.0mm 

08-45 Source of Reel Diameter 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-46) 

1 Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13) 

� When it is set to 1, the corresponding value of 10V is Pr.08-43. 

08-46 � Initial Reel Diameter Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� When Pr.08-45 is set to 1, Pr.08-46 will be read-only. 

08-47 Initial Reel Diameter 1 Unit: 0.1 

08-48 Initial Reel Diameter 2 Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� Pr.08-46 needs to be used by setting 44~46 to Pr.02-01~02-06, Pr.02-23~Pr.02-30. 



� When you need to have many types of reel diameter, please set Pr.08-45 to 0 (set by 

communication). For example: Pr.08-46 setting can be changed by inputting the digital keypad, 

HMI page plan or text panel(PLC product: TP series) via communication. 

� When the drive is at stop and it is in tension control mode, it needs to set 3-step initial reel 

diameter (Pr.08-46~48) by the digital status of multi-function input terminal setting 45 and 46 

before using terminal 44 as shown in the following table. 

MI=46 MI=45 MI=44 

OFF OFF ON: it will write Pr.08-46 into Pr.54 

OFF ON ON: it will write Pr.08-47 into Pr.08-54 

ON OFF ON: it will write Pr.08-48 into Pr.08-54 

ON ON ON:it will reset Pr.08-54 to the factory setting 

08-49 Number of Pulse Per Revolution Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1 to 10000ppr 

� When Pr.08-42 is set to 1, it needs to be used with this parameter. This parameter is the 

number of pulse per revolution that a reel rotates. 

08-50 Coil Number for Each Layer Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� It is used to set the coil number that a reel needs to increase a layer. 

08-51 Material Thickness Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 



� It is used to set the thickness of the material. 

08-52 �Filter Time of Reel Diameter Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter can be used to improve unstable of the source of reel diameter(Pr.08-42). 


08-53 Auto Compensation of Reel Diameter 

Control 

mode 




1 Enable 

� This parameter is only valid when Pr.08-21 is set to 1 and Pr.08-37 is not set to 0. It can use 

this parameter for auto compensation of reel diameter when the mechanical gear ratio or line 

speed can’t be accurate. 

08-54 �Current Reel Diameter Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1.0 to 6000.0 mm 

� When the AC motor drive is not at STOP, this parameter is read-only. 

08-55 Smart Start Function 

Control 

mode 



1 Enable 

2 In unwind mode, rewind in reverse direction 

08-56 Switch Level for Smart Start and PID Function Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26) 

� Example: Assume that the tension feedback 0~100% corresponds to loose tension to tight 

tension, Pr.08-26=50% and Pr.08-56=10%, the smart start range will be from 0~40%. 

08-57 Frequency for Smart Start Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



08-58 �Accel. Time for Smart Start Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.01~600.00 sec 



� Pr.08-55~08-58 are only valid when Pr.08-21 is set to 1. 

� Pr.08-58 is only valid when there is no source of line speed. 

� When start-up, it can set Pr.08-55 to 1 to prevent too long time for stable the dancer (under 

loose material or out of Pr.08-56 setting). 

Example: The PID control is only valid when setting Pr.08-57 and Pr.08-58 to make the tension 

feedback reaches Pr.08-56 setting. 

� In unwind mode, when Pr.08-55 is set to 2, it allows to operate the motor in opposite direction 

to tight the material automatically. 

08-59 Broken Belt Detection 

Control 

mode 



1 Enable 

08-60 Min. Line Speed of Broken Belt Detection Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0~3000.0 m/min 

08-61 Allowance Difference of Reel Diameter of Broken Belt Detection Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 1.0~6000.0 mm 

08-62 Detection Time of Broken Belt Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� Pr.08-59 is only valid when Pr.08-39 is not set to 0 and Pr.08-42 is set to 0. 

� When the broken belt detection is enabled, line speed is higher than Pr.08-60, allowance 

difference of reel diameter of broken belt detection exceeds Pr.08-61 and detection time of 

broken belt exceeds Pr.08-62, the broken belt occurs. When the broken belt occurs, it will 

display “bEb” with free running. It can be used with the multi-function output terminal setting 46 

for broken belt detection. 



08-63 Allowance Error Level of Tension/Line Speed PID Feedback Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� The corresponding value for the 100% of tension feedback is 10V. 

08-64 

Control 

mode 

Allowance Error Detection Time of Tension/Line Speed PID 

Feedback 

Unit: 0.1 



08-65 Error Treatment of Tension/Line Speed PID Feedback 

Control 

mode 





� When the error of tension PID target value and tension PID feedback exceeds Pr.08-63 and 

the allowance error detection time of tension PID exceeds Pr.08-64, tension PID feedback 

error occurs. Refer to Pr.08-65 for error treatment of tension PID feedback. It will display “tdEv” 

at this moment. 

08-66 Upper Limit of Tension PID Feedback Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0~100.0% 

08-67 Lower Limit of Tension PID Feedback Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



� It is valid when Pr.08-21 is set to 1. 


08-69 DFM Selection 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Output frequency 

1 Frequency command 



08-70 � Low-pass Filter Time of Line Speed Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� It is used to suppress the oscillation of line speed. 

08-71 

| 

08-75 

Reserved 

08-76 Source of Tension Setting 

Control 


Settings 0 Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-78) 

1 Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15 tension setting) (Pr.08-78) 

� Pr.08-76~08-86 are valid when Pr.08-21 is set to 4. 

� When Pr.08-76 is set to 0, Pr.08-78 setting can be changed by inputting the digital keypad, 

HMI page plan or text panel(PLC product: TP series) via communication. 

� When Pr.08-76 is set to 1 and one of Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to 15, Pr.08-78 will display the 

tension setting. 

08-77 Max. Tension Unit: 1 

Control 


Settings 0 ~30000 N 

08-78 �Tension Setting Unit: 1 

Control 



� Pr.08-78 will be read-only when Pr.08-76 is set to 1. The analog input 10V corresponds to 

Pr.08-77. 

08-79 Source of Zero-speed Tension Setting 

Control 



1 Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-80) 



2 Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zero-speed tension) 

(Pr.08-80) 


HMI page plan, text panel (PLC product: TP series) via communication. 

� When Pr.08-79 is set to 2 and one of Pr. 03-00~03-02=16, Pr.08-80 only displays tension 

setting. 

08-80 �Setting of Zero-speed Tension Unit: 1 

Control 



� Pr.08-80 is read-only when Pr.08-79 is set to 2. The input analog 10V corresponds to Pr.08-77. 

08-81 Source of Tension Taper 

Control 


Settings 0 Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-82) 

1 Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17 tension taper) (Pr.08-82) 

08-82 �Tension Taper Unit: 1 

Control 




HMI page plan, text panel (PLC product: TP series) via communication. 

� When Pr.08-81 is set to 1 and one of Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to 17, Pr.08-82 is used to display 

the tension taper only. 

� During the rewind process, the tension setting should be decreased by the increased reel to 

rewind the material successfully. 



actual tension output 

tension 

setting 

empty reel 

� The reel control is shown as follows. 

actual tension output 

tension 

setting 

max. reel 


C 

B 

A 

C 

B 

A 

tension 

taper=0 

tension taper 

A>B>C 

current reel 

tension 

taper=0 

tension taper 

A>B>C 

current reel 

08-83 �Friction Compensation Unit: 1 

Control 



� It is used for the compensation of dynamic friction and 100% corresponds to the motor rated 

torque. 

� The compensation coefficient of the friction torque can be got from the inertia estimation in the 

speed mode. Users can adjust by the requirement. 

08-84 �Compensation Coefficient of Material Inertial Unit: 1 

Control 


Settings 0~30000 

� Compensation coefficient of material inertia=material density*material width. Unit for density is 

kg/m 3 and for width is m. The material inertia of the reel will be changed by the reel.


08-85 �Torque Feed Forward Gain Unit: 0.1 

Control 



08-86 �Low Pass Filter Time of Torque Feed Forward Unit: 0.01 

Control 


Settings 0.00~100.00 

� Pr.08-85~08-86 are used to adjust the torque that needed by the mechanical rotation inertia 

08-87 

| 

08-99 

during acceleration/deceleration. 

Reserved 




There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-11 near to the control terminals. The pins are 

defined below: 

1: EV 

2: GND 

3: SG- 

4: SG+ 

5: Reserved 

6 1 6: Reserved 

Each VFD-VE AC drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09-00. The 

RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address. 

09-00 �Communication Address 

Control 

mode 



� If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication 

address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each 

AC motor drive must be different and unique. 

09-01 �COM1 Transmission Speed 

Control 

mode 


Settings 4.8 to 115.2kbps 

� This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC, 

etc.) and AC motor drive. 

09-02 �COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment 

Control 

mode 





3 No warning and keep operating 

� This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur. 

09-03 �COM1 Time-out Detection Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0 ~ 100.0 sec (0.0 disable) 



If Pr.09-03 is not set to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during 

the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad. 

09-04 COM1 Communication Protocol 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol 

1 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol 











12 Modbus RTU mode, protocol 






1. Control by PC or PLC 

A VFD-VE can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following 

modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote 

Terminal Unit). Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port 

communication protocol in Pr.09-04. 

Code Description: 

ASCII mode: 

Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 

64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex). 

Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’ 

ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 

Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’ 

ASCII code 

RTU mode: 

38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 

Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64 



Hex. 

� 2. Data Format 

10-bit character frame (For ASCII): 

( 7.N.2) 

Start 

bit 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 

Stop 

bit 

Stop 

bit 

7-bit character 

10-bit character frame 

( 7.E.1) 

Start 

bit 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 

Even 

parity 

Stop 

bit 



( 7.O.1) 

Start 

bit 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 

Odd 

parity 

Stop 

bit 



11-bit character frame (For RTU): 

( 8.N.2 ) 

Start 

bit 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

Stop Stop 

bit bit 



( 8.E.1 ) 

Start 

bit 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

Even 

parity 

Stop 

bit 



( 8.O.1 ) 

Start 

bit 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

Odd 

parity 

Stop 

bit 



3. Communication Protocol 

3.1 Communication Data Frame: 

ASCII mode: 

STX Start character ‘:’ (3AH) 

Address Hi Communication address: 

Address Lo 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes 

Function Hi Command code: 

Function Lo 8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes 

DATA (n-1) 

to 

DATA 0 

LRC CHK Hi 

LRC CHK Lo 

END Hi 

END Lo 

Contents of data: 

Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes 

n

RTU mode: 

START A silent interval of more than 10 ms 

Address Communication address: 8-bit address 

Function 

DATA (n-1) 

to 

DATA 0 

CRC CHK Low 

CRC CHK High 

Command code: 8-bit command 

Contents of data: 

n×8-bit data, n ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H 

RTU mode: Address=10H 

3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters) 

The format of data characters depends on the function code. 

03H: read data from register 

06H: write single register 

08H: loop detection 

10H: write multiple registers 

The available function codes and examples for VFD-VE are described as follows: 

(1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers. 

Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H. 

ASCII mode: 

Command message: Response message: 

STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’ 

Address 

‘0’ 

‘1’ 

Address 

‘0’ 

‘1’ 

Function 

‘0’ 

‘3’ 

Function 

‘0’ 

‘3’ 

‘2’ Number of data ‘0’ 

Starting data ‘1’ 

(Count by byte) ‘4’ 

address 

Number of data 

‘0’ 

‘2’ 

‘0’ 

‘0’ 

Content of starting 

address 

2102H 

‘1’ 

‘7’ 

‘7’ 

‘0’ 

(count by word) ‘0’ Content of address ‘0’ 

‘2’ 

2103H ‘0’ 




LRC Check 

‘D’ 

‘7’ 

‘0’ 

‘0’ 

END 

CR 

LF 

LRC Check 

‘7’ 

‘1’ 

RTU mode: 

END 

CR 

LF 


Address 01H Address 01H 

Function 03H Function 03H 

Starting data 

address 

21H 

02H 


(count by byte) 

04H 

Number of data 00H Content of address 17H 

(count by word) 02H 

2102H 70H 

CRC CHK Low 6FH Content of address 00H 

CRC CHK High F7H 

2103H 00H 

CRC CHK Low FEH 

(2) 06H: single write, write single data to register. 

CRC CHK High 5CH 

Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H. 

ASCII mode: 


STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’ 

Address 

‘0’ 

‘1’ 

Address 

‘0’ 

‘1’ 

Function 

‘0’ 

‘6’ 

Function 

‘0’ 

‘6’ 

‘0’ ‘0’ 

Data address 

‘1’ 

‘0’ 

Data address 

‘1’ 

‘0’ 

‘0’ 

‘0’ 

‘1’ ‘1’ 

Data content 

‘7’ 

‘7’ 

Data content 

‘7’ 

‘7’ 

‘0’ 

‘0’ 

LRC Check 

‘7’ 

‘1’ 

LRC Check 

‘7’ 

‘1’ 

END 

CR 

LF 

END 

CR 

LF 

RTU mode: 




Data address 

01H 

00H 

Data address 

01H 

00H 

Data content 

17H 

70H 

Data content 

17H 

70H 

CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK Low 86H 

CRC CHK High 22H CRC CHK High 22H 



(3) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers) 

Example: Set the multi-step speed, 

Pr.05-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.05-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H. 

ASCII Mode: 


STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’ 

Address 1 ‘0’ Address 1 ‘0’ 

Address 0 ‘1’ Address 0 ‘1’ 

Function 1 ‘1’ Function 1 ‘1’ 

Function 0 ‘0’ Function 0 ‘0’ 

‘0’ ‘0’ 

Starting data ‘5’ Starting data ‘5’ 

address ‘0’ address ‘0’ 

‘0’ 

‘0’ 

‘0’ ‘0’ 

Number of data ‘0’ Number of data ‘0’ 

(count by word) ‘0’ (count by word) ‘0’ 

‘2’ 

‘2’ 



‘0’ 

‘4’ 

LRC Check 

‘E’ 

‘8’ 

The first data 

‘1’ 

‘3’ 

END 

CR 

LF 

content ‘8’ 

‘8’ 

‘0’ 

The second data ‘F’ 

content ‘A’ 

‘0’ 

LRC Check 

‘9’ 

‘A’ 

END 

RTU mode: 

CR 

LF 




Starting data 05H Starting data address 05H 

address 00H 

00H 

Number of data 00H’ Number of data 00H 





04 CRC Check Low 41H 

The first data 13H CRC Check High 04H 

content 88H 

The second data 0FH 

content A0H 

CRC Check Low ‘9’ 

CRC Check High ‘A’ 



3.4 Check sum 

ASCII mode: 

LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the 

values of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal 

representation of the 2’s-complement negation of the sum. 

For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H. 

STX ‘:’ 

Address 1 

‘0’ 

Address 0 ‘1’ 

Function 1 

‘0’ 

Function 0 ‘3’ 

‘0’ 

‘4’ 

Starting data address 

‘0’ 

‘1’ 

‘0’ 

‘0’ 


‘0’ 

‘1’ 

LRC Check 1 

‘F’ 

LRC Check 0 ‘6’ 

END 1 

CR 

END 0 LF 

01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H. 

RTU mode: 

Address 01H 

Function 03H 

Starting data address 21H 

02H 

Number of data 00H 


CRC CHK Low 6FH 

CRC CHK High F7H 

CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps: 

Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH. 

Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order 

byte of the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register. 

Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register. 

Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with 

MSB zero filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register 

one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the 

polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3. 

Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a 

complete 8-bit byte will have been processed. 

Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue 

doing this until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are 

the CRC value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower 

bytes of the CRC value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first. 



The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two 

arguments: 

Unsigned char* data � a pointer to the message buffer 

Unsigned char length � the quantity of bytes in the message buffer 

The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer. 

Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){ 

int j; 

unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF; 

while(length--){ 

reg_crc ^= *data++; 

for(j=0;j>1) ^ 0xA001; 

}else{ 

reg_crc=reg_crc >>1; 

} 

} 

} 

return reg_crc; 

} 

3.5 Address list 

The contents of available addresses are shown as below: 

Content Address Function 

AC drive 

Parameters GGnnH 

Command 

Write only 

Command 

Write only 

GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, 

for example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H. Referencing to 

chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading 

parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can 

be read at one time. 


1: Stop 

2: Run 

3: Jog + Run 

00B: No function 

01B: FWD 

Bit 4-5 

10B: REV 

11B: Change direction 

00B: 1st accel/decel 

01B: 2nd accel/decel 

Bit 6-7 

10B: 3rd accel/decel 

11B: 4th accel/decel 

Bit 8-11 Represented 16 step speeds. 

0: No comm. multi step speed or accel/decel 

Bit 12 time 

1: Comm. multi step speed or accel/decel time 

Bit 13~14 00B: No function 

01B: operated by digital keypad 

02B: operated by Pr.00-21 setting 

03B: change operation source 

Bit 15 Reserved 

2000H Bit 0-3 

2000H 



Content Address Function 

2001H Frequency command 

Bit 0 1: EF (external fault) on 

2002H 

Bit 1 

Bit 2 

1: Reset 

1: B.B. ON 

Bit 3-15 Reserved 

2100H Error code: refer to Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22 

Status 

Bit 0 1: FWD command 

monitor 

Read only 

2119H 

Bit 1 

Bit 2 

1: Operation status 

1: Jog command 

Bit 3 1: REV command 

Bit 4 1: REV command 

Bit 8 

1: Master frequency Controlled by communication 

interface 

Bit 9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal 

Bit 10 

1: Operation command controlled by 

communication interface 

Bit 11 1: Parameters have been locked 

Bit 12 1: enable to copy parameter from keypad 

Bit 13-15 Reserved 

2102H Frequency command (F) 

2103H Output frequency (H) 

2104H Output current (AXXX.X) 

2105H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X) 

2106H Output voltage (EXXX.X) 

2107H Current step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation 

2109H Counter value 

2116H Multi-function display (Pr.00-04) 

211AH Setting frequency (F) 

211BH Max. setting frequency 

211CH Max. output frequency 

2200H Feedback Signal (XXX.XX %) 

2203H AVI analog input (XXX.XX %) 

2204H ACI analog input (XXX.XX %) 

2205H AUI analog input (XXX.XX %) 

2206H Display temperature of IGBT ( o C) 

2207H Display temperature of heatsink ( o C) 

2208H Digital input status 

2209H Digital output status 

3.6 Exception response: 

The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command 

messages from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal 

response is replied to the master device. 

The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, 

the AC motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout 

condition. 

The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot 

handle them. An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error 

message “CExx” will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a 

decimal code equal to the exception code that is described below. 



In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 

1, and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is 

returned. 

Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H: 

ASCII mode: RTU mode: 

STX ‘:’ Address 01H 

Address Low ‘0’ Function 86H 

Address High ‘1’ Exception code 02H 

Function Low ‘8’ CRC CHK Low C3H 

Function High ‘6’ CRC CHK High A1H 

Exception code 

‘0’ 

‘2’ 

LRC CHK Low ‘7’ 

LRC CHK High ‘7’ 

END 1 CR 

END 0 LF 

The explanation of exception codes: 

Exception 

code 

01 

02 

03 

04 

10 

Explanation 

Illegal function code: 

The function code received in the command message is not 

available for the AC motor drive. 

Illegal data address: 

The data address received in the command message is not 

available for the AC motor drive. 

Illegal data value: 

The data value received in the command message is not available 

for the AC drive. 

Slave device failure: 

The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action. 

Communication time-out: 

If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no 

communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set 

by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad. 

3.7 Communication program of PC: 

The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus 

ASCII mode on a PC by C language. 

#include 

#include 

#include 

#include 

#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */ 

/* the address offset value relative to COM1 */ 

#define THR 0x0000 

#define RDR 0x0000 

#define BRDL 0x0000 

#define IER 0x0001 



#define BRDH 0x0001 

#define LCR 0x0003 

#define MCR 0x0004 

#define LSR 0x0005 

#define MSR 0x0006 

unsigned char rdat[60]; 

/* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */ 

unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','\r','\n'}; 

void main(){ 

int i; 

outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* interrupt enable */ 

outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt as data in */ 

outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80)); 

/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */ 

outportb(PORT+BRDL,12); /* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/ 

outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00); 

outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set protocol, =06H, =1AH, 

=0AH, =07H, =1BH, =0BH */ 

for(i=0;i


09-07 �COM2 Time-out Detection (Keypad) Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0 ~ 100.0 sec 

� If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during 

the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad. 

09-08 �COM2 Communication Protocol (Keypad) 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol 


















09-09 �Response Delay Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.0 ~ 200.0 msec 

� This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command 

as shown in the following. 

RS-485 BUS 

PC or PLC command 

Handling time 

of the AC drive 

Response Delay Time 

Pr.09-09 

Response Message 

of the AC Drive 



09-10 � Transmission Master Frequency Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.00 ~ 600.00 Hz 

� When Pr.00-20 is set to 1 (RS485 communication). The AC motor drive will save the last 

frequency command into Pr.09-10 when abnormal turn-off or momentary power loss. After re- 

power on, it will with the frequency set in Pr.09-10 if there is no new frequency command. 

09-11 � Block Transfer 1 Unit: 1 










Control 

mode 



� There is a group of block transfer parameter available in the AC motor drive (Pr.09-11 to 

Pr.09-20). User can use them (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20) to save those parameters that you want 

to read. 

09-21 Multi-function Output Status 

Control 

mode 



09-22 Display Digital Value of Analog Output 2 

Control 

mode 




09-23 Display Digital Value of Analog Output 3 

Control 

mode 




� Pr.09-22 and Pr.09-23 are used to communicate with multi-function extension card (EMV- 

APP01). Refer to Appendix B for details. 

� When Pr.09-22 and Pr.09-23 are set to 4095, it corresponds to +10V. 



Group 10 PID Control 

In this group, ASR is short for the Auto Speed Regulation and PG is short for Pulse Generator. 

10-00 Encoder Pulse Unit: 1 

Control 

mode VFPG FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 600 

Settings 1 to 20000 (Max=20000 for 2-pole motor) 

� A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the 

motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control. 

10-01 Encoder Input Type Setting 

Control 



Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a 

reverse run command 

1 

FWD REV 

A 

B 

Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a 


2 

FWD REV 

A 

B 

Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low 

input=reverse direction, high input=forward direction) 

3 

FWD REV 

A 

4 

5 

B 


input=forward direction, high input=reverse direction) 

FWD REV 

A 

B 

Single-phase input 

A 


10-02 �Encoder Feedback Fault Treatment 


Control 





10-03 �Detection Time for Encoder Feedback Fault Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode VFPG FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 1.00 


� When encoder loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time 

exceeds the detection time for encoder feedback fault (Pr.10-03), the encoder signal error will 

occur. Refer to the Pr.10-02 for encoder feedback fault treatment. 

10-04 �ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 1 Unit: 0.1 

Control 


Settings 0 to 40 Hz 

10-05 �ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 1 Unit: 0.001 

Control 



10-06 � ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 2 Unit: 0.1 

Control 



10-07 � ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 2 Unit: 0.001 

Control 



10-21 � P Gain of Zero Speed Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 

VFPG FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 10 




10-22 � I Gain of Zero Speed Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 

VFPG FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 0.100 


10-08 �ASR 1/ASR2 Switch Frequency Unit: 0.01 

Control 


Settings 5.00 o 600.00Hz 

� When Pr.11-00 is set to bit0=1 (ASR), Pr.10-04~10-07 and Pr.10-21~10-22 are read-only. 

� ASR P determines Proportional control and associated gain (P). ASR I determines integral 

control and associated gain (I). 

� When integral time is set to 0, it is disabled. Pr.10-08 defines the switch frequency for the 

ASR1 (Pr.10-04, Pr.10-05) and ASR2 (Pr.10-06, Pr.10-07). 

PI 

10-21 

10-22 

10-04 

10-05 

10-06 

10-07 

5Hz 5Hz 

0Hz 5Hz 10-08 

Hz 

� When using multi-function input terminals to switch ASR1/ASR2, the diagram will be shown as 

follows. 

Setting multi-function input terminal to 27 

(ASR1/ASR2 switch) 

OFF 

ASR 1 

0.1 sec 


ON 

ASR 2 

0.1 sec 

OFF 

ASR 1 

10-09 � Low Pass Filter Time of ASR Output Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode FOCPG TQCPG Factory Setting: 0.008 


� It defines the filter time of the ASR command.


10-10 � Encoder Stall Level Unit: 1 

Control 

mode VFPG FOCPG Factory Setting: 115 


� This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault 

occurs. (max. output frequency Pr.01-00 =100%) 

10-11 � Encoder Stall Detection Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode VFPG FOCPG Factory Setting: 0.1 


10-12 � Encoder Slip Range Unit: 1 

Control 



10-13 �Encoder Slip Detection Time Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode VFPG FOCPG Factory Setting: 0.5 


10-14 � Encoder Stall and Slip Error Treatment 

Control 





� When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds Pr.10-12 setting, detection time 

exceeds Pr.10-13 or motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-10 setting, it will start to accumulate time. 

If detection time exceeds Pr.10-11, the encoder feedback signal error will occur. Refer to 

Pr.10-14 encoder stall and slip error treatment. 

10-15 � Pulse Input Type Setting 

Control 

mode 





1 

2 

3 

4 

Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a 


A 

B 

FWD REV 

Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a 


A 

B 

FWD REV 


input=reverse direction, high input=forward direction) 

A 

B 

FWD REV 


input=forward direction, high input=reverse direction) 

A 

B 

FWD REV 

� When this setting is different from Pr.10-01 setting and the source of the frequency command 

is pulse input (Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5), it may have 4 times frequency problem. 

Example: Assume that Pr.10-00=1024, Pr.10-01=1, Pr.10-15=3, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it 

needs 4096 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution. 

Assume that Pr.10-00=1024, Pr.10-01=1, Pr.10-15=1, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it needs 

1024 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution. 

10-16 � Output Setting for Frequency Division (denominator) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� This parameter is used to set the denominator for frequency division(for PG card EMV-PG01L 

or EMV-PG01O). For example, when it is set to 2 with feedback 1024ppr, PG output will be 

1024/2=512ppr. 



10-17 � Electrical Gear A (PG1 of PG card) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 

VFPG FOCPG Factory Setting: 100 


10-18 � Electrical Gear B (PG2 of PG card) Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� Rotation speed = pulse frequency/encoder pulse (Pr.10-00) * PG Electrical Gear A / PG 

Electrical Gear B. 

10-19 � Positioning for Encoder Position Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 to 65535 pulses 

� This parameter determines the internal position in the position mode. 

� It needs to be used with multi-function input terminal setting =35 (enable position control). 

� When it is set to 0, it is the Z-phase position of encoder. 

10-20 �Range for Encoder Position Attained Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 to 20000 pulses 

� This parameter determines the internal positioning position attained in the position control 

mode. 

10-23 � Feed Forward Gain of APR Unit: 1 

Control 



� For position control, the larger this parameter is set, the less pulse differential it will be and 

also make the position response be faster. But it may occur overshoot easily. 

� When the multi-function input terminal is set to 37 (ON), this parameter can be set by 

requirement. If it is set to any value except 0 and adjust Pr.11-17 (Low-pass Filter Time of PG2 

Pulse Input) to lessen position overshoot and pulse differential. If it is set to 0, position 

overshoot won’t occur but the pulses differential is determined by Pr.11-18 (APR Gain). 



10-24 

� Deceleration Time for Internal Position/Waiting Time for 

Switching Max. Frequency 

Unit: 0.01/0.1 

Control 

mode VFPG FOCPG Factory Setting: 3.00/3.0 

Settings 0.00 to 600.00 sec/0.0 to 6000.0 sec 

� When the multi-function input terminal is set to 35 (ON), this parameter setting will be the 

deceleration time for internal position. 

� When the multi-function input terminal is set to 43 (ON), this parameter setting will be the 

waiting time for switching the max. frequency. 

output 

10-24 

frequency 

PG 

feedback 

10-00 

10-01 

RUN 

MI=d35 

MO=d39 

10-19 

Time 

10-25 � Max. Frequency for Resolution Switch Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



� This function is used to enhance the function of unstable speed/position due to insufficient 

resolution of analog simulation value. It needs to use with external input terminals (one of 

Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06/Pr.02-23 to Pr.02-30 should be set to 43). After setting this parameter, it 

needs to adjust the analog output resolution of controller. 


AUI +10V 

AUI 0V 

AUI -10V 

frequency 

command 

output 

frequency 

0Hz 

resolution 

switch 

MI=43 


accel./decel. time 

01-12~01-19 

Max. output frequency 

01-00 

waiting time for 

switching max. 

frequency 10-24 

Max. frequency for 

resolution switch 

Pr.10-25 


forward running reverse running 


ON 

Max. output frequency 

01-00 

Max. frequency for 

resolution switch 

Pr.10-25 waiting time for 

switching max. 

frequency 10-24 

10-27 � Mechanical Gear at Load A1 Unit: 1 

10-28 � Mechanical Gear at Motor B1 Unit: 1 

10-29 � Mechanical Gear at Load A2 Unit: 1 

10-30 � Mechanical Gear at Motor B2 Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� Parameters 10-27 to 10-30 can be used with the multi-function input terminal (set to 48) to 

switch to Pr.10-27~10-28 or Pr.10-29~10-30 as shown as follows. 

load 

encoder is used 

at load side 

Gear 

A1 or A2 

gear ratio 

MI=48 ON =A2:B2 

OFF=A1:B1 

PG 

card 

Gear 

B1 or B2 

Driver 

Motor



In this group, APR is short for Adjust Position Regulator. 

11-00 System Control 

Control 


Settings Bit 0 Auto tuning for ASR and APR 

Bit 1 Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode) 

Bit 2 Zero Servo 

Bit 3 Reserved 

Bit 4 Enable gain adjustment of position loop KP 

� Bit 0=0: Pr.10-04~10-07, 10-21~10-22 and 11-18 will be valid and Pr.11-02~11-04 and 11-11 

are invalid. 

Bit 0=1: system will generate an ASR setting. At this moment, Pr. 10-04~10-07, 10-21~10-22 

and Pr.11-18 will be invalid and Pr.11-02~11-04 and 11-11 are valid. 

Bit 1=0: no function. 

Bit 1=1: Inertia estimate function is enabled. 

Bit 2=0: no function. 

Bit 2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07), it will use zero servo function. 

Estimate inertia value 

YES 

Setting auto gain adjustment 

Pr.11-00=1 

NO 

Adjust Pr.11-02, 11-03 and 11-11 

separately by speed response 

Adjust by requirement 

Pr.11-04 (PDFF function) 


Pr.10-08 

(ASR1/ASR2 switch frequency) 


Pr.07-32~35 (torque limit) 

Adjust gain value by manual 

Pr.11-00=0 (factory setting) 

Adjust Pr.10-04, 10-05, 10-06, 

10-07, 10-21 and 10-22 

separatelyby speed response 


Pr.10-09 (for general, 

no need to adjust) 


10-21 

10-22 

10-04 

10-05 

10-06 

10-07 

PI 

5Hz 5Hz 

Pr.11-11 

use to adjust the 

strength of z eroservo 

lock 


0Hz 10-08 

Hz 

0Hz 10-08 

PI adjustment-manual gain PI adjustment-auto gain 


11-02 

11-03 

PI 

1. Pr. 11-01 value 

2. set Pr.11-00 to bi t 0=1 

5Hz 5Hz 

11-01 � Per Unit of System Inertia Unit: 1 

Control 


Settings 1 to 65535 (256=1PU) 

� To get the system inertia from Pr.11-01, user needs to set Pr.11-00 to bit1=1 and execute 

continuous forward/reverse running. 

11-02 � Low-speed Bandwidth Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



11-03 � High-speed Bandwidth Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



11-11 � Zero-speed Bandwidth Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 



� After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters 

Pr.11-02, 11-03 and 11-11 separately by speed response. The larger number you set, the 

faster response you will get. Pr.10-08 is the switch frequency for low-speed/high-speed 

bandwidth. 

11-04 � PDFF Gain Value Unit: 1 

Control 

mode FOCPG Factory Setting: 30 


Hz


� After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-04 to reduce 

overshoot. Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation. 

� This parameter will be invalid when Pr.05-12 is set to 1. 

frequency 

PI 

PDFF 

11-05 � Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1 Unit: 1 

Control 



11-06 � Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2 Unit: 1 

Control 




Time 

� Pr.11-05 is used to adjust the output voltage of flux weakening curve. 

� For the spindle application, the adjustment method is 

1. It is used to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency. 

2. Monitor the output voltage 

3. Adjust Pr.11-05 (motor 1) or Pr.11-06 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach 

motor rated voltage. 

4. The larger number it is set, the larger output voltage you will get. 

output torque 

Flux weakening curve 

11-05 

or 

11-06 

01-01 

or 

01-35 

100% 

90% 

frequency


11-07 � Detection Time for Phase-loss Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 



11-09 � Level of Phase-loss Unit: 0.1 

Control 

mode 



11-29 Accumulative Operation Time of Phase-loss Unit: 1 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0 to 65535 (hour) 

� When the power phase-loss occurs and it exceeds the level (Pr.11-09) and the detection 

time(Pr.11-07), it will execute the phase-loss protection(Pr.06-02). The AC motor drive will 

record the operation time during phase-loss in Pr.11-29. 

� If it is set to 0 or a larger number, it will short the life of rectifier and capacitors in the AC motor 

drive. 


11-10 � Speed Feed Forward Gain Unit: 1 

Control 



� It is used to improve the speed response. 

00-20 

+ + 

- 

speed feedback 

11-10 

Speed feed 

forward gain 

ASR 

+ 

+ 

Tq Bias 

Torque limit 

07-32~07-35 

10-09 

Torque 

command 



11-12 � Speed Response of Flux Weakening Area Unit: 1 

Control 



� It is used to control the response speed for the flux weakening area. The larger number you 

set, the faster response you will get. 

11-13 � Notch Filter Depth Unit: 1 

Control 


Settings 0 to 20 db 

11-14 � Notch Filter Frequency Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode FOCPG Factory Setting: 0.00 


� This parameter is used to set resonance frequency of mechanical system. It can be used to 

suppress the resonance of mechanical system. 

� The larger number you set Pr.11-13, the better suppression resonance function you will get. 

� The notch filter frequency is the resonance of mechanical frequency. 

11-15 � Gain Value of Slip Compensation Unit: 0.01 

Control 

mode 

SVC Factory Setting: 1.00 


� It is only valid in SVC mode. 

� When the AC motor drive drives the asynchronous motor, slip will increase when the load is 

added. This parameter can be used to change frequency, lower slip and make the motor be 

synchronous when running under rated current. When the output current is higher than no-load 

current, the AC motor drive will adjust frequency by this parameter. If the actual speed is 

slower than expected, please increase the setting or decrease the setting. 

11-16 � Low-pass Filter Time of Keypad Display Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.001 to 65.535 Sec 

� It is used to lower the blinking frequency of LCD display. 



11-17 � Low-pass Filter Time of PG2 Pulse Input Unit: 0.001 

Control 

mode 


Settings 0.000 to 65.535 Sec 

� It can be used to stable the speed command when Pr.00-20 is set to 5 and multi-function input 

terminal is set to 37 (OFF) to regard the pulse command as frequency command. 

11-18 � APR Gain Unit: 0.01 

Control 



� It can be used to change the pulse differential when Pr.00-20 is set to 5, multi-function input 

terminal is set to 37 (ON) and Pr.11-00 is set to bit 0=0. 

11-19 � APR Curve Time Unit: 0.01 

Control 



� It is valid when the multi-function input terminal is set to 35(ON). The larger it is set, the longer 

11-20 

| 

11-28 

11-30 

| 

11-40 

the position time will be. 

Reserved 

Reserved 





5.1 Over Current (OC) 

Remove short circuit 

or ground fault 

Yes 

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 

ocA ocd OC 

Over-current Over-current 

Over current 

during acceleration during acceleration 

Yes 

Reduce the load or 

increase the power 

of AC motor drive 

No Reduce torque 

compensation 

No 

Yes 

Suitable torque 

compensation 

Check if there is any short circuits and 

grounding between the U, V, W and motor 

No No No 

No No No 

Yes 

Reduce torque 

compensation 

No 

Check if 

acceleration time 

is too short by 

No 

Check if 

deceleration time 

is too short by 

load inertia. 

load inertia. 

Maybe AC motor drive 

has malfunction or error 

Yes Yes 

due to noise. Please 

contact DELTA. 

No 

Yes 

Increase accel/decel 

time 

Can acceleration 

time be made longer? 

No 

Reduce load or increase 

the power of AC motor 

drive 


Yes 

If load is too large 

Can deceleration 

time be made longer? 

No 

Check braking 

method. Please 

contact DELTA 

Is load changed 

suddenly? 

Yes 

Reduce load or increase 

the power of AC motor 

drive

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 

5.2 Ground Fault 

GFF 

Ground fault 

5.3 Over Voltage (OV) 

Reduce voltage to 

be within spec. 

Maybe AC motor drive 

has malfunction or 

misoperation due to 

noise. Please contact 

DELTA. 

Reduce moment 

of inertia 

If output circuit(cable or 

motor) of AC motor drive 

is grounded? 

No 

Yes 

Remove grounding 

No 

Over voltage 

If voltage is within 

specification 


Yes 

No 

No 

If over-voltage is occurred without load 

When OV occurs, check if the 

voltage of DC BUS is greater 

than protection value 

Yes 

Yes 

No If OV occurs when 

sudden acceleration 

stops 

Yes 

No 

Increase 

acceleration 

time 

No 

Yes 

No 

Increase 

deceleration 

time 

No 

Reduce moment of load inertia 

Use brake unit or DC brake 

Yes 

Maybe AC motor drive has 

malfunction or misoperation 

due to noise. Please 


Yes 

Yes 

Increase setting time 

No 

Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA. 

Need to considerate to 

use brake unit and 

DC brake

5.4 Low Voltage (Lv) 

Low voltage 

Power cut, including momentary 

power loss 

No 

Check if there is any malfunction 

component or disconnection in 

power supply circuit 

No 

Check if voltage is 

within specification 

Yes 

Check if Lv occurs when 

breaker and magnetic 

contactor is ON 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Check if there is heavy load 

with high start current in the 

same power system 

No 

Check if voltage between +1/+2 

and - is greater than Pr.06-00 

No 

Yes 

Control circuit has malfunction or 

misoperation due to noise. Please 


No 

Yes 


Restart after reset 

Change defective component 

and check connection 

Change power supply 

system for requirement 

Yes Using the different power 

supply for this drive and 

heavy load system 

No 

Suitable power 

transformer capacity 


Yes 

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction. 

Please contact DELTA.


5.5 Over Heat (oH1, oH2, oH3) 

AC motor drive overheats 

Heat sink overheats 

Check if temperature of heat sink 

is larger than 90 O 

C 

5.6 Overload 

Yes 

No 

No 

If cooling fan functions normally Change cooling fan 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Check if cooling fan is jammed Remove obstruction 

Check if surrounding temperature 

is within specification 

OL 


No 

Adjust surrounding temperature 

to specification 

OL1/ OL2 

No Temperature detection malfunctions. 

Please contact DELTA. 

Reduce load 

Yes 

Check if the setting of electronic 

thermal relay is suitable 

Yes 


Yes 

No 

Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive 

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or 

misoperation due to noise. Please contact 

DELTA. 


No 

Modify setting 

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction 

or misoperation due to noise.

5.7 Display of KPV-CE01 is Abnormal 

Abnormal display or no display 

Yes 

Turn the power off and power 

on again after display is off 

Display normal? 

Yes 

No 

AC motor drive works normally 

5.8 Phase Loss (PHL) 

Phase loss 

Check if the wiring of terminals R, S and T is OK 

Yes 

Check if the screws of terminals are tightened 

Yes 

Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced 

No 

Check if it is 40hp and above 

No 

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation 

due to noise. Please contact DELTA. 


Fix connector and eliminate noise 


No 

Check if all connectors are connected 

well and if there is no noise 

Yes 

AC motor drive has malfunction. 


No 

Connect all three 

phase well 

No Tighten all screws 

Yes Please check the wiring 

and power system for 

abnormal power 

Yes Please check the fuse 

at AC side


5.9 Motor cannot Run 

Motor cannot run 

Reset after clearing 

fault and then RUN 

It can run when 

no faults occur 

Press RUN key to 

check if it can run 

Press UP key to 

set frequency 

Yes 

Press UP to 

check if motor 

can run 

No 

Modify frequency 

setting 

Motor has malfunction 

No 


Yes 

Check if the setting 

of torque 

compensation 

is correct 

No 

Check if CE01 

displays 

No 

Check if non-fuse 

No 

breaker and magnetic Set them to ON 

normally 

contactor are ON 

Yes 

Yes 

Check if there is any 

Check if any faults 

fault code displayed Check if input No occur, such as 

voltage is normal Lv, PHL or 

No 

Yes 

disconnection 

Yes 

No 

No Check if input FWD No 

or REV command 

Yes 

No 

No 

Set frequency or not 

Yes 

if upper bound freq. 

and setting freq. is 

lower than the min. 

output freq. 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Increase the setting of 

torque compensation 

Input "RUN" 

command 

by keypad 

Check if there is any 

output voltage from 

terminals U, V and W 

Yes 

Check if motor 

connection 

is correct 

If jumper or DC 

reactor is connected 

between +1 and +2/B1 


Yes 

No 

No 

No 

Use jumper 

or DC reactor 



Check if the wiring 

of terminal FWD 

and between 

REV-DCM is correct 

Correct connection 

Check if the parameter 

setting and wiring of 

analog signal and 

multi-step speed 

are correct 

Yes 

Change switch or relay 

No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction. 


No Connect correctly 

Yes 

Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load. 

For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released. 

Change defective 

potentiometer and 

relay

5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed 

Yes 

Modify the setting 

No 

If the setting of 

Pr.04-00 to Pr.04-14 

are the same 

No 

Yes 

No 

Motor can run but 

cannot change speed 

Check if the setting of the 

max. frequency is too low 

No 

If the setting of frequency Yes 

is out of range(upper/lower) 

bound 

No 

No 

Check if the wiring between 

M1~M6 to DCM is correct 

Yes 

Check if frequency for 

each step is different 

Yes 

If accel./decel. time 

is very long 

Yes 

Please set suitable 

accel./decel. time by 

load inertia 



No 

No 

No 

Connect 

correctly 

Modify the setting 

Press UP/DOWN key 

to see if speed has 

any change 

Yes 

Yes 

If there is any change 

of the signal that sets Yes 

frequency (0-10V and 

4-20mA) 

No 

Check if the wiring of 

external terminal is correct 

Change defective 

potentiometer 

Change frequency setting 


due to noise. Please contact DELTA.


5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration 

Motor stalls during 

acceleration 

Thicken or shorten the 

wiring between the 

motor or AC motor drive 

Reduce load or 

increase the capacity 


Yes 

Yes 

Check if acceleration 

time is too short 

No 

Check if the inertia 

of motor and load 

are very high 

No 

No 

No 

No 


Yes 

Yes 

Check if the voltage of 

terminal is lower than 

before 

Check if the load torque 

is too high 

Check if the torque 

compensation is suitable 

Increase torque compensation 

5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected 

Motor does not run 

as expected 

Check if V/f characteristic 

and torque compensation 

is suitable 

Yes 

Yes 

Run in low speed continuously 

No 

Yes 


No 

Check if output voltage of U, V W 

is balanced 

No 

Yes 

No 

Yes 



Increase setting time 

Yes 

Use special motor? 

No 

Reduce load or 

increase the capacity 


Maybe AC motor drive has 

malfunction or misoperation 

due to noise. Please contact 

DELTA 

Adjust V/f characteristic 

and lower torque compensation 

Please use specific motor 

Reduce load or increase the 

capacity of AC motor drive 

Motor has malfunction

5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise 


There are many noises surround the AC motor drives and invade it by radiation or power circuit. It 

may cause the misoperation of control circuit and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, that is 

a solution to increase the noise tolerance of AC motor drive. But it is not the best one due to the limit. 

Therefore, solve it from the outside as following will be the best. 

1. Add surge killer on the relay or contact to suppress switching surge between ON/OFF. 

2. Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial circuit and separate from the main 

circuit wiring. 

3. Comply with the wiring regulation for those shielded wire and use isolation amplifier for 

long wire. 

4. The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulation and ground independently, 

i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machine and power equipment. 

5. Connect a noise filter at the input terminal of the AC motor drive to prevent noise from 

power circuit. 

In a word, three-level solutions for electromagnetic noise are “no product”, “no spread” and 

“no receive”. 

5.14 Environmental Condition 

Since AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental condition 

stated in the appendix A. Following are the remedial measures for necessary. 

1. To prevent vibration, anti-vibration spacer is the last choice. The vibration tolerance must 

be within the specification. The vibration effect is equal to the mechanical stress and it 

cannot occur frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damaging AC motor drive. 

2. Store in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes/dust to prevent rustiness, poor 

contact. It also may cause short by low insulation in a humid location. The solution is to 

use both paint and dust-proof. For particular occasion, use the enclosure with whole-seal 

structure. 

3. The surrounding temperature should be within the specification. Too high or low 

temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage 

will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to clean and 

periodical check for the air cleaner and cooling fan besides having cooler and sunshade. 

In additional, the microcomputer may not work in extreme low temperature and needs to 

have heater. 



4. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. Do 

not turn off the air conditioner and have exsiccator for it. 

5.15 Affecting Other Machines 

AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machine due to many reasons. The solutions are as 

follows. 

� High Harmonic at Power Side 

If there is high harmonic at power side during running, the improved methods are: 

1. Separate power system: use transformer for AC motor drive. 

2. Use reactor at the power input terminal of AC motor drive or decrease high harmonic by 

multiple circuit. 

3. If there is phase lead capacitor, it should use serial reactor to prevent capacitor damage 

from high harmonic. 

serial reactor 

phase lead capacitor 

� Motor Temperature Rises 

When the motor is induction motor with ventilation-cooling-type used in variety speed 

operation, bad cooling will happen in the low speed. Therefore, it may overheat. Besides, 

high harmonic is in output waveform to increase copper loss and iron loss. Following 

measures should be used by load situation and operation range when necessary. 

1. Use the motor with independent power ventilation or increase the horsepower. 

2. Use inverter duty motor. 

3. Do NOT run in the low speed 


Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 

6.1 Fault Code Information 

The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different 

alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be 

activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display. 

The six most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication. 

NOTE 

Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal. 

6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions 

Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions 

Over-current during 

acceleration 

(Output current 

exceeds triple rated 

current during 

acceleration.) 


deceleration 




deceleration.) 


steady state 

operation 




constant speed.) 

Hardware failure in 

current detection 

1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for 

possible poor insulation at the output 

lines. 

2. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the 

Acceleration Time. 

3. AC motor drive output power is too small: 

Replace the AC motor drive with the next 

higher power model. 


possible poor insulation at the output line. 

2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the 

Deceleration Time. 





possible poor insulation at the output line. 

2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check 

for possible motor stall. 




Return to the factory 


Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| 


When (one of) the output terminal(s) is 

grounded, short circuit current is more than 

50% of AC motor drive rated current, the AC 

motor drive power module may be damaged. 

NOTE: The short circuit protection is 

provided for AC motor drive protection, 

Ground fault 

not for protection of the user. 

1. Check the wiring connections between the 

AC motor drive and motor for possible 

short circuits, also to ground. 

2. Check whether the IGBT power module is 

damaged. 

3. Check for possible poor insulation at the 

output line. 

Short-circuit is 

detected between 

upper bridge and 

lower bridge of the 

IGBT module 

DC BUS over-voltage 

during acceleration 


(230V: DC 450V; 

460V: DC 900V) 


during deceleration 

(230V: DC 450V; 

460V: DC 900V) 


in constant speed 

(230V: DC 450V; 

460V: DC 900V) 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Check if the input voltage falls within the 

rated AC motor drive input voltage range. 

Check for possible voltage transients. 

If DC BUS over-voltage due to 

regenerative voltage, please increase the 

Deceleration Time or add an optional 

brake resistor. 

Hardware failure in Check if input voltage is within specification 

voltage detection 

DC BUS voltage is 

less than Pr.06-00 

during acceleration 


less than Pr.06-00 

range and monitor if there is surge voltage. 

during deceleration 1. Check if the input voltage is normal 


less than Pr.06-00 in 

constant speed 


less than Pr.06-00 at 

stop 

2. Check for possible sudden load 

Phase Loss 

Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases 

are connected without loose contacts. 

For models 40hp and above, please check if 

the fuse for the AC input circuit is blown. 




IGBT overheating 

IGBT temperature 

exceeds protection 

level 

1 to15HP: 90 o C 

20 to 100HP: 100 o 1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls 

within the specified temperature range. 

2. Make sure that the ventilation holes are 

not obstructed. 

3. Remove any foreign objects from the 

heatsinks and check for possible dirty 

heat sink fins. 

C 4. Check the fan and clean it. 

5. Provide enough spacing for adequate 

ventilation. 

Heatsink 

overheating 

Heat sink 

temperature exceeds 

90 o 1. Ensure that the ambient temperature 

falls within the specified temperature 

range. 

2. Make sure that the ventilation holes are 

not obstructed. 

3. Remove any foreign objects from the 

heatsinks and check for possible dirty 

C 

heat sink fins. 

4. Check the fan and clean it. 

5. Provide enough spacing for adequate 

ventilation. 

Motor overheating 

The AC motor drive 

detects that the 

internal temperature 

exceeds Pr.06-30 

(PTC level) 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Make sure that the motor is not 

obstructed. 

Ensure that the ambient temperature 

falls within the specified temperature 

range. 

Take the next higher power AC motor 

drive model. 

OH1 hardware failure Return to the factory 

OH2 hardware failure Return to the factory 

Fan failure 

Overload 

The AC motor drive 

detects excessive 

1. 

2. 

Make sure that the fan is not obstructed. 


drive output current. 

NOTE: The AC motor 

drive can withstand 

up to 150% of the 

rated current for a 

maximum of 60 

seconds. 

1. 

2. 

Check whether the motor is overloaded. 

Take the next higher power AC motor 

drive model. 

1. Check the setting of electronics thermal 

Electronics thermal relay (Pr.06-14) 

relay 1 protection 2. Take the next higher power AC motor 

drive model 

1. Check the setting of electronics thermal 

Electronics thermal relay (Pr.06-28) 

relay 2 protection 2. Take the next higher power AC motor 

drive model 

Broken fuse 

1. Check whether the fuse of the transistor 

The fuse at DC side module is functioning well 

is broken for 30hp 2. Check whether the loading side is short- 

and below 

circuit 




These two fault codes 

will be displayed 

when output current 

exceeds the overtorque 

detection level 

(Pr.06-07 or Pr.06- 

10) and exceeds 

over-torque 

detection(Pr.06-08 or 

Pr.06-11) and it is set 

2 or 4 in Pr.06-06 or 

Pr.06-09. 

Internal EEPROM 

can not be 

programmed. 

Internal EEPROM 

can not be read. 

Isum error 

U-phase error 

V-phase error 

W-phase error 

CC (current clamp) 

OC hardware error 

OV hardware error 

GFF hardware error 

1. Check whether the motor is overloaded. 

2. Check whether motor rated current 

setting (Pr.05-01) is suitable 

3. Take the next higher power AC motor 

drive model. 

1. Press “RESET” key to the factory setting 

2. Return to the factory. 

1. Press “RESET” key to the factory setting 

2. Return to the factory. 

Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still 

displayed on the keypad please return to the 

factory 

Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still 

displayed on the keypad please return to the 

factory 

Auto tuning error 

1. 

2. 

Check cabling between drive and motor 

Retry again 

PID loss (ACI) 

1. 

2. 

Check the wiring of the PID feedback 

Check the PID parameters settings 

PG feedback error 

Check if Pr.10-01 is set to 0 when it is PG 

feedback control 

PG feedback loss Check the wiring of the PG feedback 

PG feedback stall 1. Check the wiring of the PG feedback 

2. Check if the setting of PI gain and 

PG slip error 

deceleration is suitable 

3. Return to the factory 

Pulse input error 1. Check the pulse wiring 

Pulse input loss 2. Return to the factory 

ACI loss 

1. 

2. 

Check the ACI wiring 

Check if the ACI signal is less than 4mA 

1. Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is 

closed to GND. Output U, V, W will be 

External Fault 

turned off. 

2. Give RESET command after fault has 

been cleared. 

1. When the multi-function input terminals 

MI1 to MI6 are set to emergency stop, 

Emergency stop 

the AC motor drive stops output U, V, W 

and the motor coasts to stop. 

2. Press RESET after fault has been 

cleared. 




1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is 

active, the AC motor drive output will be 

External Base Block 

2. 

turned off. 

Deactivate the external input terminal 

(B.B) to operate the AC motor drive 

again. 

Password is locked. 

Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON 

after power OFF to re-enter the correct 

password. See Pr.00-07 and 00-08. 

Illegal function code 

Check if the function code is correct (function 

code must be 03, 06, 10, 63) 

Illegal data address 

(00H to 254H) 

Check if the communication address is correct 

Illegal data value 

Check if the data value exceeds max./min. 

value 

Data is written to 

read-only address 

Communication 

time-out 

Check if the communication address is correct 

COM1: exceeds Check if the wiring for the communication is 

Pr.09-03 setting, 

COM2: exceeds 

Pr.09-07 setting 

Keypad (KPV-CE01) 

correct 

communication 

time-out 

COM1: exceeds 

Pr.09-03 setting, 

COM2: exceeds 

Pr.09-07 setting 

1. 

2. 

Check if the wiring for the 

communication is correct 

Check if there is any wrong with the 

keypad 

Brake resistor fault 

If the fault code is still displayed on the keypad 

after pressing “RESET” key, please return to 

the factory. 

Y-connection/Δ- 1. Check the wiring of the Y-connection/Δconnection 

switch 

error 

When Pr.07-13 is not 

2. 

connection 

Check the parameters settings 

set to 0 and 

momentary power off 1. Set Pr.07-13 to 0 

or power cut, it will 

display dEb during 

accel./decel. stop. 

2. Check if input power is stable 

It will be displayed 

when slip exceeds 

Pr.05-26 setting and 

time exceeds Pr.05- 

27 setting. 

1. 

2. 

Check if motor parameter is correct (please 

decrease the load if overload 

Check the settings of Pr.05-26 and Pr.05- 

27 





when broken belt 

detection function is 

enabled(Pr.08-59), 

allowance error is 

higher than Pr.08-61 

and detection time 

exceeds Pr.08-62. 


when the allowance 

error of tension PID 

feedback exceeds 

Pr.08-63 setting and 

allowance error 

detection time 

exceeds Pr.08-64 

setting. 

1. Check if the belt is broken 

2. Check the settings of Pr.08-60, Pr.08-62 

and Pr.08-63 

1. Check if the PID feedback is correct 

2. Check if the material is broken 

3. Check the settings of Pr.08-63 and Pr.08- 

64 

6.1.2 Reset 

There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault: 

1. Press RESET 

STOP 

key on KPV-CE01. 

2. Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.02-01~Pr.02-06/ Pr.02-23~Pr.02-30 to 5) 

and then set to be ON. 

3. Send “RESET” command by communication. 

NOTE 

Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or 

personal injury due to immediate operation. 


6.2 Maintenance and Inspections 


Modern AC motor drives are based on solid state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is 

required to operate this AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is 

recommended to have a check-up of the AC motor drive performed by a qualified technician. 

Daily Inspection: 

Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are: 

1. Whether the motors are operating as expected. 

2. Whether the installation environment is abnormal. 

3. Whether the cooling system is operating as expected. 

4. Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation. 

5. Whether the motors are overheating during operation. 

6. Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter. 

Periodic Inspection: 

Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10 

minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully 

discharged by measuring the voltage between +1/+2 and -. The voltage between +1/+2 and-should 

be less than 25VDC. 

DANGER! 

1. Disconnect AC power before processing! 

2. Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any 

metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are 

allowed. 

3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring. 

4. Prevent static electricity. 



Periodical Maintenance 

� Ambient environment 

Check Items Methods and Criterion 

Check the ambient temperature, 

humidity, vibration and see if 

there are any dust, gas, oil or 

water drops 

If there are any dangerous 

objects 

� Voltage 

Visual inspection and measurement 

with equipment with standard 

specification 

Visual inspection � 


Check if the voltage of main 

circuit and control circuit is 

correct 

� Keypad 

Measure with multimeter with standard 

specification 


Is the display clear for reading Visual inspection � 

Any missing characters Visual inspection � 

� Mechanical parts 


If there is any abnormal sound 

or vibration 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

One 

Year 


� 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

� 

One 

Year 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

One 

Year 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

Visual and aural inspection � 

If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws � 

One 

Year


Maintenance 

Period 


Daily Half One 

Year Year 

If any part is deformed or 

damaged 

If there is any color change by 

overheating 



If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection � 

� Main circuit 


If there are any loose or missing 

screws 

If machine or insulator is 

deformed, cracked, damaged or 

with color change due to 

overheating or ageing 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

Tighten or replace the screw � 

Visual inspection 

NOTE: Please ignore the color 

change of copper plate 

If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection � 

� Terminals and wiring of main circuit 


If the terminal or the plate is 

color change or deformation due 

to overheat 

If the insulator of wiring is 

damaged or color change 


� 

One 

Year 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 



If there is any damage Visual inspection � 

One 

Year


� DC capacity of main circuit 


If there is any leak of liquid, 

color change, crack or 

deformation 

Measure static capacity when 

required 

� Resistor of main circuit 


Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

Static capacity ≥ initial value X 0.85 � 


If there is any peculiar smell or 

insulator cracks due to overheat 

If there is any disconnection 

� Transformer and reactor of main circuit 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

Visual inspection, smell � 

Visual inspection or measure with 

multimeter after removing wiring 

between +1/+2 ~ - 

Resistor value should be within ± 10% 


If there is any abnormal vibration 

or peculiar smell 

� Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit 

One 

Year 

One 

Year 


� 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

Visual, aural inspection and smell � 


If there are any loose screws Visual and aural inspection � 

If the contact works correctly Visual inspection � 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

One 

Year 

One 

Year

� Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit 



If there are any loose screws and 

connectors 

If there is any peculiar smell and 

color change 

If there is any crack, damage, 

deformation or corrosion 

If there is any liquid is leaked or 

deformation in capacity 

� Cooling fan of cooling system 

Tighten the screws and press the 

connectors firmly in place. 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 





If there is any abnormal sound or 

vibration 

Visual, aural inspection and turn the 

fan with hand (turn off the power 

before operation) to see if it rotates 

smoothly 


� 

Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw � 

If there is any color change due to 

overheat 

� Ventilation channel of cooling system 

One 

Year 

One 

Year 

Change fan � 


If there is any obstruction in the 

heat sink, air intake or air outlet 


Maintenance 

Period 

Daily Half 

Year 

� 

One 

Year




Voltage Class 230V Class 

Appendix A Specifications 

Model Number VFD-XXXV 007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 

Max. Applicable Motor Output 

(kW) 

0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 

Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 

Output Rating 

Input Rating 

Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.9 2.7 4.2 6.5 9.5 13 19 25 29 34 46 55 

Rated Output Current for 

Constant Torque (A) 

5.0 7.5 11 17 25 33 49 65 75 90 120 146 


Variable Torque (A) 

6.25 9.4 13 21 31 41 61 81 93 112 150 182 

Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage 

Output Frequency (Hz) 0.00~600.00 Hz 

Carrier Frequency (kHz) 15 9 6 

Rated Input Current (A) 6.4 9.9 15 21 25 33 52 63 68 79 106 126 

Rated Voltage/Frequency 

3-phase 

200-240V, 50/60Hz 

Voltage Tolerance ± 10%(180~264 V) 

Frequency Tolerance ± 5%(47~63 Hz) 

Cooling Method Natural Fan Cooled 

Weight (kg) 2.7 3.2 4.5 6.8 8 10 13 13 13 13 36 36 

Output Rating 

Input Rating 

Voltage Class 460V Class 

Model Number VFD-XXXV 007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 


(kW) 


(hp) 

0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 

1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 

Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 2.3 3.2 4.2 6.3 9.9 14 18 24 29 34 46 56 69 80 100 


Constant Torque (A) 

3.0 4.2 6.0 8.5 13 18 24 32 38 45 60 73 91 110 150 


Variable Torque (A) 

3.8 5.3 7.5 10 16 22 30 40 47 56 75 91 113 138 188 

Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-phase Proportional to Input Voltage 

Output Frequency (Hz) 0.00~600.00 Hz 

Carrier Frequency (kHz) 15 9 6 

Rated Input Current (A) 

3-phase 380~480V 

4.0 5.8 7.4 9.9 12 17 25 27 35 42 56 67 87 101 122 

Rated Voltage 3-phase 380 to 480 V 

Voltage Tolerance ± 10%(342~528 V) 

Frequency Tolerance ± 5%(47~63 Hz) 

Cooling Method Natural Fan Cooled 

Weight (kg) 2.7 3.2 4.5 6.8 8 10 13 13 13 13 36 36 36 50 50 

Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 A-1

Appendix A Specifications| 

Control Characteristics 

Protection Characteristics 

Environmental Conditions 

General Specifications 

Control System 1 V/f curve; 2 V/f+PG; 3 SVC; 4 FOC+PG; 5 TQR+PG 

Start Torque Starting torque is 150% at 0.5Hz and 0Hz with FOC + PG control mode 

Speed Control Range 1:100 Sensorless vector (up to 1:1000 when using PG card) 

Speed Control Resolution ± 0.5% Sensorless vector (up to ± 0.02% when using PG card) 

Speed Response Ability 5Hz (up to 30Hz for vector control) 

Max. Output Frequency 0.00 to 600.00Hz 

Output Frequency Accuracy Digital command ± 0.005%, analog command ± 0.5% 

Frequency Setting 

Resolution 

Digital command ± 0.01Hz, analog command: 1/4096(12-bit) of the max. output 

frequency 

Torque Limit Max. is 200% torque current 

Torque Accuracy ± 5% 

Accel/Decel Time 0.00 to 600.00/0.0 to 6000.0 seconds 

V/f Curve Adjustable V/f curve using 4 independent points and square curve 

Frequency Setting Signal ± 10V, 4~20mA, pulse input 

Brake Torque About 20% 

Motor Protection Electronic thermal relay protection 

Over-current Protection The current forces 220% of the over-current protection and 300% of the rated 

current 

Ground Leakage Current 

Protection 

Higher than 50% X rated current 

Overload Ability Constant torque: 150% for 60 seconds, variable torque: 200% for 3 seconds 

Over-voltage Protection Over-voltage level: Vdc > 400/800V; low-voltage level: Vdc < 200/400V 

Over-voltage Protection for 

the Input Power 

Varistor (MOV) 

Over-temperature Protection Built-in temperature sensor 

Compensation for the 

Momentory Power Loss 

Up to 5 seconds for parameter setting 

Protection Level NEMA 1/IP21 

Operation Temperature -10 o C to 40 o C 

Storage Temperature -20 o C to 60 o C 

Ambient Humidity Below 90% RH (non-condensing) 

Vibration 9.80665m/s 2 (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s 2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz 

Installation Location Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust 

Approvals 

A-2 Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05

Appendix B Accessories 

B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives 

Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will 

void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors. 

For instance, in 460V series, 100hp/75kW, the AC motor drive needs 2 brake units with total of 16 

brake resistors, so each brake unit uses 8 brake resistors. The brake unit should be at least 10 cm 

away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference. Refer to the “Brake Unit Module User 

Manual” for further details. 

Voltage 

230V Series 

460V Series 

Applicable 

Motor 

hp kW 

Full Load 

Torque 

Nm 

Resistor value 

spec for each 

AC Motor 

Drive 

Brake Unit 

Model VFDB 

No. of Units 

Used 

Brake Resistors 

Model and No. of 

Units Used 

Brake 

Torque 

10%ED 

Min. Equivalent 

Resistor Value for 

each AC Motor 

Drive 

1 0.75 0.427 80W 200Ω BR080W200 1 125 82Ω 

2 1.5 0.849 300W 100Ω BR300W100 1 125 82Ω 

3 2.2 1.262 300W 100Ω BR300W100 1 125 82Ω 

5 3.7 2.080 400W 40Ω BR400W040 1 125 33Ω 

7.5 5.5 3.111 500W 30Ω BR500W030 1 125 30Ω 

10 7.5 4.148 1000W 20Ω BR1K0W020 1 125 20Ω 

15 11 6.186 2400W 13.6Ω 2015 1 BR1K2W6P8 2 125 13.6Ω 

20 15 8.248 3000W 10Ω 2015 1 BR1K5W005 2 125 10Ω 

25 18.5 10.281 4800W 8Ω 2022 1 BR1K2W008 4 125 8Ω 

30 22 12.338 4800W 6.8Ω 2022 1 BR1K2W6P8 4 125 6.8Ω 

40 30 16.497 6000W 5Ω 2015 2 BR1K5W005 4 125 5Ω 

50 37 20.6 9600W 4Ω 2015 2 BR1K2W008 8 125 4Ω 

1 0.75 0.427 80W 750Ω BR080W750 1 125 160Ω 

2 1.5 0.849 300W 400Ω BR300W400 1 125 160Ω 

3 2.2 1.262 300W 250Ω BR300W250 1 125 160Ω 

5 3.7 2.080 400W 150Ω BR400W150 1 125 130Ω 

7.5 5.5 3.111 500W 100Ω BR500W100 1 125 91Ω 

10 7.5 4.148 1000W 75Ω BR1K0W075 1 125 62Ω 

15 11 6.186 1000W 50Ω 4030 1 BR1K0W050 1 125 39Ω 

20 15 8.248 1500W 40Ω 4030 1 BR1K5W040 1 125 40Ω 

25 18.5 10.281 4800W 32Ω 4030 1 BR1K2W008 4 125 32Ω 

30 22 12.338 4800W 27.2Ω 4030 1 BR1K2W6P8 4 125 27.2Ω 

40 30 16.497 6000W 20Ω 4030 1 BR1K5W005 4 125 20Ω 

50 37 20.6 9600W 16Ω 4045 1 BR1K2W008 8 125 16Ω 

60 45 24.745 9600W 13.6Ω 4045 1 BR1K2W6P8 8 125 13.6Ω 

75 55 31.11 12000W 10Ω 4030 2 BR1K5W005 8 125 10Ω 

100 75 42.7 19200W 6.8Ω 4045 2 BR1K2W6P8 16 125 6.8Ω 

NOTE 

Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 B-1

Appendix B Accessories| 

1. Please select the factory setting resistance value (Watt) and the duty-cycle value (ED%). 

2. If damage to the drive or other equipment are due to the fact that the brake resistors and the 

brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void. 

3. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. 

4. If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of the 

Watt figures. 

5. Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to switch 

power off to the AC motor drive! 

6. When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be 

less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the 

right-most column in the table). An example of 575V 100HP, the min. equivalent resistor value 

for each AC motor drive is 12.5Ω with 2 brake units connection. Therefore, the equivalent 

resistor value for each brake unit should be 25Ω. 

7. Please read the wiring information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to taking 

into operation. 

8. Definition for Brake Usage ED% 

Explanation: The definition of the barke usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for the 

brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake 

resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque would 

decrease accordingly. Suggested cycle time is one minute 

100% 

T1 

Brak e Time 

Cycle Time 

B-2 Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 

T0 

ED% = T1/T0x100(%) 

9. For safety consideration, install an overload relay between the brake unit and the brake resistor. 

In conjunction with the magnetic contactor (MC) prior to the drive, it can perform complete 

protection against abnormality. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect 

the brake resistor from damage due to frequent brake, or due to brake unit keeping operating 

resulted from unusual high input voltage. Under such circumstance, just turn off the power to 

prevent damaging the brake resistor.

R/L1 

S/L2 

T/L3 

O.L. 

NFB 

Thermal 

Overload 

Relay or 

temperature 

switch 

MC 

MC 

SA 

Surge 

Absorber 

R/L1 U/T1 

S/L2 V/T2 

T/L3 W/T3 

VFD Series 

+P ( ) 

-N ( ) 

+P ( ) 

-N ( ) 


IM 

MOTOR 

Brake 

Unit 

Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 B-3 

B1 

B2 

Thermal Overload 

Relay 

O.L. 

Brake 

BR Resistor 

Temperature 

Switch 

Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive 

user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit. 

Note2: Do NOT wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system. 

10. For model VFD110V43B, the brake unit is built-in. To increase the brake function, it can add 

optional brake unit.


B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors 

(Dimensions are in millimeter) 

Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W070, BR300W100, BR300W250, BR300W400, 

BR400W150, BR400W040 

Model no. L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g) 

BR080W200 

BR080W750 

BR300W070 

BR300W100 

BR300W250 

BR300W400 

BR400W150 

BR400W040 

140 125 20 5.3 60 160 

215 200 30 5.3 60 750 

265 250 30 5.3 60 930 

B-4 Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05


Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1KW020, BR1KW075 

Model no. L1 L2 H D W 

BR500W030 

BR500W100 

BR1KW020 

BR1KW075 

Max. Weight 

335 320 30 5.3 60 1100 

400 385 50 5.3 100 2800 


(g)


Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040 

Output Rating 

Input 

Rating 

Protection 

Environment 

B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit 

230V Series 460V Series 

2015 2022 4030 4045 4132 

Max. Motor Power (kW) 15 22 30 45 132 

Max. Peak Discharge Current 

(A) 10%ED 

40 60 40 60 240 

Continuous Discharge Current 

(A) 

15 20 15 18 75 

Brake Start-up Voltage (DC) 330/345/360/380/400/ 

415±3V 

660/690/720/760/800/83 

0±6V 

DC Voltage 200~400VDC 400~800VDC 

Heat Sink Overheat Temperature over +95°C (203 o F) 

Alarm Output Relay contact 5A 120VAC/28VDC (RA, RB, RC) 

Power Charge Display Blackout until bus (+~-) voltage is below 50VDC 

618/642/66 

7/690/725/ 

750±6V 

Installation Location Indoor (no corrosive gases, metallic dust) 

Operating Temperature -10°C ∼ +50°C (14 o F to 122 o F) 

Storage Temperature -20°C ∼ +60°C (-4 o F to 140 o F) 

Humidity 90% Non-condensing 

Vibration 

9.8m/s 2 (1G) under 20Hz 

2m/s 2 (0.2G) at 20~50Hz 

Wall-mounted Enclosed Type IP50 IP10 


B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit 

(Dimensions are in millimeter[inch]) 

Figure 1: VFDB2015, VFDB2022, VFDB4030, VFDB4045 

121.0 [4.76] 

80.0 [3.15] 

CHARGE ACT. ERR. 

GREEN YELLOW RED 

R3.3 [R0.13] 

189.5 [7.46] 

200.0 [7.87] 


130.0 [5.12] 



Figure 2: VFDB4132 

VFDB4132 

CHARGE ACT OC OH 


B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart 


For 3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2-4 times maximum input current 

rating. 

(Refer to Appendix A for rated input current) 

Model 

3-phase 

Recommended no-fuse 

breaker (A) 

Model 

Recommended no-fuse 

breaker (A) 

VFD007V23A-2 10 VFD110V43B-2 50 

VFD007V43A-2 5 VFD150V23A-2 125 

VFD015V23A-2 15 VFD150V43A-2 60 

VFD015V43A-2 10 VFD185V23A-2 150 

VFD022V23A-2 30 VFD185V43A-2 75 

VFD022V43A-2 15 VFD220V23A-2 175 

VFD037V23A-2 40 VFD220V43A-2 100 

VFD037V43A-2 20 VFD300V23A-2 225 

VFD055V23A-2 50 VFD300V43A-2 125 

VFD055V43A-2 30 VFD370V23A-2 250 

VFD075V23A-2 60 VFD370V43A-2 150 

VFD075V43A-2 40 VFD450V43A-2 175 

VFD110V23A-2 100 VFD550V43C-2 250 

VFD110V43A-2 50 VFD750V43C-2 300 



B.3 Fuse Specification Chart 

Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted. 

Model 

I (A) 

Input 

I (A) 

Line Fuse 

Output I (A) Bussmann P/N 

VFD007V23A-2 5.7 5.0 10 JJN-10 

VFD007V43A-2 3.2 2.7 5 JJN-6 

VFD015V23A-2 7.6 7.0 15 JJN-15 

VFD015V43A-2 4.3 4.2 10 JJN-10 

VFD022V23A-2 15.5 11 30 JJN-30 

VFD022V43A-2 5.9 5.5 15 JJN-15 

VFD037V23A-2 20.6 17 40 JJN-40 

VFD037V43A-2 11.2 8.5 20 JJN-20 

VFD055V23A-2 26 25 50 JJN-50 

VFD055V43A-2 14 13 30 JJN-30 

VFD075V23A-2 34 33 60 JJN-60 

VFD075V43A-2 19 18 40 JJN-40 

VFD110V23A-2 50 49 100 JJN-100 

VFD110V43A-2 25 24 50 JJN-50 

VFD110V43B-2 25 24 50 JJN-50 

VFD150V23A-2 60 65 125 JJN-125 

VFD150V43A-2 32 32 60 JJN-60 

VFD185V23A-2 75 75 150 JJN-150 

VFD185V43A-2 39 38 75 JJN-70 

VFD220V23A-2 90 90 175 JJN-175 

VFD220V43A-2 49 45 100 JJN-100 

VFD300V23A-2 110 120 225 JJN-225 

VFD300V43A-2 60 60 125 JJN-125 

VFD370V23A-2 142 145 250 JJN-250 

VFD370V43A-2 63 73 150 JJN-150 

VFD450V43A-2 90 91 175 JJN-175 

VFD550V43C-2 130 110 250 JJN-250 

VFD750V43C-2 160 150 300 JJN-300 


B.4 AC Reactor 

B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value 

460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase 


kW HP 

Fundamental 

Amps 

Max. 

continuous 

Amps 

Inductance (mH) 

3% impedance 5% impedance 

0.75 1 4 6 9 12 

1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9 

2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5 

3.7 5 8 12 3 5 

5.5 7.5 12 18 2.5 4.2 

7.5 10 18 27 1.5 2.5 

11 15 25 37.5 1.2 2 

15 20 35 52.5 0.8 1.2 

18.5 25 35 52.5 0.8 1.2 

22 30 45 67.5 0.7 1.2 

30 40 55 82.5 0.5 0.85 

37 50 80 120 0.4 0.7 

45 60 80 120 0.4 0.7 

55 75 100 150 0.3 0.45 

75 100 130 195 0.2 0.3 

B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value 

230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase 

kW HP 

Fundamental 

Amps 

Max. 


continuous 

Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance 

0.75 1 8 12 3 5 

1.5 2 8 12 1.5 3 

2.2 3 12 18 1.25 2.5 

3.7 5 18 27 0.8 1.5 

5.5 7.5 25 37.5 0.5 1.2 

7.5 10 35 52.5 0.4 0.8 

11 15 55 82.5 0.25 0.5 

15 20 80 120 0.2 0.4 



kW HP 

Fundamental 

Amps 

Max. 


continuous 


18.5 25 80 120 0.2 0.4 

22 30 100 150 0.15 0.3 

30 40 130 195 0.1 0.2 

37 50 160 240 0.075 0.15 

460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase 

kW HP 

Fundamental 

Amps 

Max. 


continuous 


0.75 1 4 6 9 12 

1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9 

2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5 

3.7 5 12 18 2.5 4.2 

5.5 7.5 18 27 1.5 2.5 

7.5 10 18 27 1.5 2.5 

11 15 25 37.5 1.2 2 

15 20 35 52.5 0.8 1.2 

18.5 25 45 67.5 0.7 1.2 

22 30 45 67.5 0.7 1.2 

30 40 80 120 0.4 0.7 

37 50 80 120 0.4 0.7 

45 60 100 150 0.3 0.45 

55 75 130 195 0.2 0.3 

75 100 160 240 0.15 0.23 


B.4.3 Applications for AC Reactor 

Connected in input circuit 


Application 1 Question 

When more than one AC motor drive is 

connected to the same power, one of them is 

ON during operation. 

Correct wiring 

M1 

M2 

Mn 

reactor 

When applying to one of the AC motor drive, 

the charge current of capacity may cause 

voltage ripple. The AC motor drive may 

damage when over current occurs during 

operation. 

AC motor drive 




Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive is 

connected to the same power. 

motor 

motor 

motor 

Surges will be generated at the instant of 

silicon rectifier switching on/off. These surges 

may damage the mains circuit. 




power 

reactor 

reactor 

silicon rectifier 



Used to improve the input power factor, to 

reduce harmonics and provide protection from 

AC line disturbances. (surges, switching 

spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC line 

reactor should be installed when the power 

supply capacity is 500kVA or more and 

exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity, or the 

mains wiring distance ≤ 10m. 


large-capacity 

power reactor 


DC 

motor 

When power capacity is too large, line 

impedance will be small and the charge 

current will be too large. That may damage 

AC motor drive due to higher rectifier 

temperature. 

small-capacity 


motor

B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) 

Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch) 

Cable 

type 

Recommended Wire 

Size 

(Note) AWG mm 2 Nominal 

(mm 2 ) 

Singlecore 

Threecore 

Qty. 

≦10 ≦5.3 ≦5.5 1 

≦2 ≦33.6 ≦38 4 

≦12 ≦3.3 ≦3.5 1 

≦1 ≦42.4 ≦50 4 

Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable. 

Diagram A 

Please wind each wire 4 times around the 

core. The reactor must be put at inverter 

output as close as possible. 

Power 

Supply 

R/L1 U/T1 

S/L2 V/T2 

T/L3 W/T3 

Zero Phase Reactor 

Wiring 

Method 

Diagram 

A 

Diagram 

B 

Diagram 

A 

Diagram 

B 

MOTOR 


Diagram B 

Please put all wires through 4 cores in 

series without winding. 

Power 

Supply 


R/L1 

S/L2 

T/L3 

U/T1 

V/T2 

W/T3 

Zero Phase Reactor 

MOTOR 

Note 1: The table above gives approximate 

wire size for the zero phase reactors but the 

selection is ultimately governed by the type 

and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable 

must fit through the center hole of zero 

phase reactors. 

Note 2: Only the phase conductors should 

pass through, not the earth core or screen. 

Note 3: When long motor output cables are 

used an output zero phase reactor may be 

required to reduce radiated emissions from 

the cable.


B.6 DC Choke Recommended Values 

230V DC Choke 

Input voltage kW HP DC Amps Inductance (mh) 

0.75 1 9 7.50 

1.5 2 12 4.00 

2.2 3 18 2.75 

3.7 5 25 1.75 

230Vac 

50/60Hz 

3-Phase 

5.5 

7.5 

11 

15 

7.5 

10 

15 

20 

32 

40 

62 

92 

0.85 

0.75 

Built-in 

Built-in 

18.5 25 110 Built-in 

22 30 125 Built-in 

30 40 -- Built-in 

37 50 -- Built-in 

460V DC Choke 

Input voltage kW HP DC Amps Inductance (mh) 

0.75 1 4 25.00 

1.5 2 9 11.50 

2.2 3 9 11.50 

3.7 5 12 6.00 

5.5 7.5 18 3.75 

7.5 10 25 4.00 

460Vac 11 15 32 Built-in 

50/60Hz 15 20 50 Built-in 

3-Phase 18.5 25 62 Built-in 

22 30 80 Built-in 

30 40 92 Built-in 

37 50 110 Built-in 

45 60 125 Built-in 

55 75 200 Built-in 

75 100 240 Built-in 


B.7 Remote Controller RC-01 

Dimensions are in millimeter 


8 6 5 4 16 15 14 13 11 RC-01 terminal block 

AFMACM AVI +10V DCM MI5 FWD REV JOG 

VFD-VE Programming: 

Pr.00-20 set to 2 

Pr.00-21 set to 1 (external controls) 

Pr.02-00 set to 1 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls) 

Pr.02-05 (MI5) set to 5 (External reset) 

Wiring connections 

VFD-VE 

I/O Block 



B.8 PG Card (for Encoder) 

B.8.1 EMV-PG01X 

AB2: 

PG2 signal 

mode switch 

ABZ1: 

PG1 signal 

mode switch 

1. Terminals descriptions 

PG1 

Pulse feedback 

PG2 

Pulse input 

Terminal Symbols Descriptions 

VP 

PS1: 

5/12V switch 

Power source of EMV-PG01X (use PS1 to switch 12V/5V) 

Output Voltage: +5V/+12V±5% 200mA 

DCM Power source and input signal common 

A1, A1 

B1, B1 

Z1, Z1 

A2, A2 

B2, B2 

2. Wiring Notes 

Input signal. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be 1-phase or 2phase 

input. Maximum 300kP/sec 

Input signal. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1-phase or 2phase 


Grounding 

a. Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires 

parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). 

b. Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm 2 (AWG24 to AWG18). 

3. Wire length (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion) 


Types of Pulse 

Generators 

Output Voltage 50m 

Open Collector 50m 

Line Driver 300m 

Complementary 70m 

4. Basic Wiring Diagram 

wiring 1 

Factory 

setting 


NFB 

R 

S 

T 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

Multi-step 1 

Multi-step 2 

Multi-step 3 

Multi-step 4 

No function 

No function 



Maximum Wire Length Wire Gauge 

jumper Br ak e res istor 

(optional) 

- +1 +2/B1 B2 

R/L1 U/T1 

S/L2 V/T2 

T/L3 W/T3 

24V 

FWD 

REV 

MI1 VP 

DCM 

MI2 

A1 

MI3 A1 

MI4 B1 

MI5 B1 

Z1 

MI6 

Z1 

DC M 

multi-function 

input 

terminals 

VP 

A2 

A2 

B2 

B2 

DCM 

1.25mm 2 (AWG16) or above 

Line driver 

incremental encoder 

manual pulse generator 

(MPG) 

10-17 

10-18 


U 

V 

W 

Motor 

M 

3~ 

PG 

Line driver


Factory 

setting 

wiring 2 

Y0 

Y0 

Y1 

Y1 

phas e dif f erenc e is 90 

o 


NFB 

R 

S 

T 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

Multi-step 1 

Multi-step 2 

Multi-step 3 

Multi-step 4 

No function 

No function 


EH-PLC 

Y0 

Y0 

Y1 

Y1 

jumper Brake resistor 

(optional) 

- +1 +2/B1 B2 

R/L1 U/T1 

S/L2 V/T2 

T/L3 W/T3 

24V 

FWD 

REV 

MI1 VP 

DCM 

MI2 

A1 

MI3 A1 

MI4 B1 

MI5 B1 

Z1 

MI6 

Z1 

DC M 

A2 

A2 

B2 

B2 



U 

V 

W 

Motor 

M 

3~ 

PG 

Line driver 

Example: 

It is recommended to set it in TP mode when VFD-VE series inputs the pulse, i.e. inputs pulse from 

PLC or host controller into the A2, /A2, B2 and /B2 on the PG card of AC motor drive to prevent the 

signal received interference (if using input signal with open collector, please use the external power 

(such as PLC power) with a pull-high resistor).

The best wiring: 

Applicable models: 

EMV-PG01X 

EMV-PG01O 

EMV-PG01L 


NFB 

R 

Factory 

setting 

S 

T 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

Multi-step 1 

Multi-step 2 

Multi-step 3 

Multi-step 4 

No function 

No function 


PLC 

Y0 

C0 

GND 

0~30Vmax 

jumper Brak e res istor 

(optional) 

- +1 +2/B1 B2 

R/L1 U/T1 

S/L2 

T/L3 

24V 

FWD 

REV 

MI1 

MI2 

MI3 

MI4 

MI5 

MI6 

DCM 

750~2kW,1/4W 

A2 

A2 

V/T2 

W/T3 

VP 

DCM 

A1 

A1 

B1 

B1 

Z1 

Z1 

TP 

AB2 

OC 


M 

3~ 


U 

V 

W 

Motor 

PG 

Line driver 


5. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders) 

Types of Pulse Generators 

ABZ1+ PS1 AB2+PS1 

5V 12V 5V 12V 

VOLTAGE 

VCC 

O/P 

0V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 

OC 

12V 

5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 

12V 

OC 

5V



VCC 

VCC 

Open collector 

Line driver 

Q 

Q 

0V 

Complementary 

0V 

B.8.2 EMV-PG01O 

O/P 

PG OUT 

Pulse output 

AB2: PG2 signal 

mode switch 

O/P 

ABZ1: PG1 signal 

mode switch 

ABZ1+ PS1 AB2+PS1 

5V 12V 5V 12V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

PG1 

Pulse feedback 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 


TP 

OC 

12V 

5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

PG2 

Pulse input 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

PS1: 

5/12V switch 

TP 

OC 

12V 

5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V


VP 

Terminal 

Symbols 


Descriptions 

Power source of EMV-PG01O (use PS1 to switch 12V/5V) 

Output Voltage: +5V/+12V±5% 200mA 


A1, A1 

B1, B1 

Z1, Z1 

A2, A2 

B2, B2 

A/O, B/O, Z/O 


Input signal from encoder. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be 

1-phase or 2-phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec 

Input signal from encoder. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1phase 

or 2-phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec 

Output signal. It has division frequency function (Pr.10-16), open 

collector: max. output DC20V 50mA 

Grounding 




3. Wire length: (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion) 


Generators 






wiring 1 





Factory 

setting 

wiring 2 

Factory 

setting 

No -fuse bre ake r 

NFB 

R 

S 

T 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

Multi-step 1 

Multi-step 2 

Multi-step 3 

Multi-step 4 

No function 

No function 


man ual p ul se g ene rato r 

(MPG) 

10-17 

10-18 

Y0 

Y0 

Y1 

Y1 

Li ne dri ver 

No -fuse bre ake r 

NFB 

R 

S 

T 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

Multi-step 1 

Multi-step 2 

Multi-step 3 

Multi-step 4 

No function 

No function 


ph ase di ffe ren ce is 9 0 

o 

EH -PLC 

Y0 

Y0 

Y1 

Y1 

COM 

j umpe r 

- +1 +2/B1 B2 

R/L 1 U/T1 

S/L2 V/T2 

T/L3 W/T3 

+24V 

FWD 

REV 

MI1 

MI2 

VP 

DC M 

MI3 

A1 

MI4 

A1 

MI5 

B1 

MI6 

B1 

DCM 

Z1 

Z1 

VP 

A2 

A2 

B2 

B2 

DC M 

VP 

DC M 

A/O 

B/O 

Z/O 

EMV-PG01O 

Bra ke re sisto r (o ptio na l) 

Motor 

M 

3~ 


U 

V 

W 

j umpe r Bra ke re sis to r (o ptiona l) 

- +1 +2/B1 B2 

R/L 1 U/T1 

S/L2 V/T2 

T/L3 W/T3 

+24V 

FWD 

REV 

MI1 

MI2 

VP 

DC M 

MI3 

A1 

MI4 

A1 

MI5 

B1 

MI6 

B1 

DCM 

Z1 

Z1 

A2 

A2 

B2 

B2 

DC M 

VP 

DC M 

A/O 

B/O 

Z/O 

EMV-PG01O 

U 

V 

W 

PG 

Li ne dri ver 


Motor 

M 

3~ 

PG 

Li ne dr ive r 

i ncre menta l e nco der




ABZ1+PS1 AB2+PS1 

5V 12V 5V 12V 

VCC 

VOLTAGE 

O/P 

0V 


VCC 

VCC 

Line driver 

Q 

Q 

0V 

O/P 

Complementary 

0V 

O/P 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 


TP 

OC 

12V 

5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 

OC 

12V 

5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 

OC 

12V 

5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V 

TP 

OC 

12V 

5V 

TP 12V 

OC 5V


B.8.3 EMV-PG01L 

PG OUT 

pulse output 

AB2: PG2 signal 

mode switch 

ABZ1: PG1 signal 

mode switch 


VP 

Terminal 

Symbols 

PG1 

pulse feedback 

Power source of EMV-PG01L 

Output Voltage: +5V±5% 200mA 

PG2 

pulse input 

Descriptions 


A1, A1 

B1, B1 

Z1, Z1 

A2, A2 

B2, B2 

A/O, B/O, Z/O 


Input signal. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be 1-phase or 2phase 


Input signal. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1-phase or 2phase 


Output signal. It has division frequency function (Pr.10-16), Line 

driver: max. output DC5V 50mA 

Grounding 






3. Wire length: (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion) 


Generators 






wiring 1 

Factory 

setting 

Non -fu se breaker 

NFB 

R 

S 

T 

FWD/STOP 

REV/STOP 

Multi-step 1 

Multi-step 2 

Multi-step 3 

Multi-step 4 

No function 

No function 



jumper 

- +1 +2 /B1 B2 

R/ L1 U/ T1 

S/L2 V/T2 

T/L3 

+24V 

FWD 

REV 

W/T3 

MI1 

MI2 

VP 

DC M 

MI3 A1 

MI4 A1 

MI5 B1 

MI6 B1 

DCM 

Z1 

Z1 

AO 

AO 

BO 

BO 

ZO 

ZO 

VP 

A2 

A2 

B2 

B2 

DCM 


Braking resist or (o ptional) 

Motor M 

3~ 


U 

V 

W 

Line driver 

PG 

Line driver 

incre mental encoder 

manua l pulse generator 

(MPG) 

10 -1 7 

10 -1 8


wiring 2 

Factory 

setting 

Y0 

Y0 

Y1 

Y1 

jumper 


NFB 

R 

- +1 +2/B1 B2 

R/L1 U/T1 

S 

S/L2 V/T2 

T 

T/L3 W/ T3 

FWD/STOP 

+24V 

FWD 

REV/STOP 

REV 

Multi-step 1 

MI1 

Multi-step 2 

MI2 

Multi-step 3 

MI3 

Multi-step 4 

MI4 

No function 

MI5 

No function 

MI6 


DCM 

VP 

DCM 

A1 

A1 

B1 

B1 

Z1 

Z1 

ph ase di ffe ren ce is 9 0 

o 

EH-PLC 

Y0 

Y0 

Y1 

Y1 

COM 

A2 

A2 

B2 

B2 

DCM 

Brake resistor (optional) 

Motor 

M 

3~ 


AO 

AO 

BO 

BO 

ZO 

ZO 

EMV-PG01L 



VCC 

VOLTAGE 

O/P 

0V 


VCC 

0V 

O/P 

U 

V 

W 

PG 

Line driver 


ABZ1 AB2 

5V 5V 

TP 

OC 

TP 

OC 

TP 

OC 

TP 

OC


VCC 

Line driver 

Q 

Q 

Complementary 

0V 

O/P 


ABZ1 AB2 

5V 5V 


TP 

OC 

TP 

OC 

TP 

OC 

TP 

OC


B.9 AMD-EMI Filter Cross Reference 

AC Drives Model Number FootPrint 

VFD007V43A-2, VFD015V43A-2, VFD022V43A-2 RF022B43AA Y 

VFD037V43A-2 RF037B43BA Y 

VFD055V43A-2, VFD075V43A-2, VFD110V43A-2, 

VFD110V43B-2 

RF110B43CA Y 

VFD007V23A-2, VFD015V23A-2 10TDT1W4C N 

VFD022V23A-2, VFD037V23A-2 26TDT1W4C N 


VFD185V43A-2 


VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2 

VFD550V43A-2, VFD750V43A-2, VFD550V43C-2, 

VFD750V43C-2 


VFD450V43A-2 

50TDS4W4C N 

100TDS84C N 

200TDDS84C N 

150TDS84C N 

VFD370V23A-2 180TDS84C N 

Installation 

All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise 

and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an 

EMI filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use 

DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance. 

We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed and 

wired according to user manual: 

� EN61000-6-4 

� EN61800-3: 1996 + A11: 2000 

� EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1 st Environment, restricted distribution) 

General precaution 

1. EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate. 

2. Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to 

the AC motor drive. 

3. Please wire as short as possible. 



4. Metal plate should be grounded. 

5. The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and 

the contact area should be as large as possible. 

Choose suitable motor cable and precautions 

Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to 

observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable. 

1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best). 

2. The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length 

and maximum contact area. 

3. Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding. 

Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with 

the plate and shielding. 

saddle the plate with grounding 

Saddle on both ends 

Saddle on one end 



The length of motor cable 

When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge 

voltages easily due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the 

motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation quality. 

To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below: 

� Use a motor with enhanced insulation. 

� Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive 

� The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible 

(10 to 20 m or less) 

� For models 7.5hp/5.5kW and above: 

Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V 

460VAC input voltage 66 ft (20m) 328 ft (100m) 1312 ft (400m) 


� For models 5hp/3.7kW and less: 

Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V 



NOTE 

When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may 

malfunction (especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or less. 

To prevent it, please use AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 00-17 PWM carrier 

frequency). 

NOTE 

Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor 

drive. 

� If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may cause 

leakage current. It will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage current or not 

insure the correction of current display. The worst case is that AC motor drive may damage. 

� If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the sum 

of the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor. 


B.9.1 Dimensions 

Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch) 

Order P/N: RF015B21AA / RF022B43AA 

16 

(0.63) 

50 

(1.97) 

28 

(1.1) 

24 

(0.94) 

226 

(8.9) 


239 

(9.4) 


118 

90 

(3.54) 

226 

(8.9) 

5.5 

(3.37)


Order P/N: RF022B21BA / RF037B43BA 

30 

60 

15 30 

302 


150 

110 

5.5 

302 

315

Order P/N: RF110B43CA 

20 

33 

60 

26 

382 



200 

120 

7.0 

382 

398


Order P/N: 10TDT1W4C 

Order P/N: 26TDT1W4C 


Order P/N: 50TDS4W4C 

Order P/N: 100TDS84C 




Order P/N: 200TDDS84C 







B.10 Multi-function I/O Extension Card 

B.10.1 Functions 

EMV-APP01 optional multi-function I/O extension card is exclusively designed for VFD-VE 

series and used with firmware version 2.04 and above. It communicates with the AC motor 

drive by RS-485 communication port (COM1). To make sure that the communication is 

normal, it needs to set the COM1 communication protocol to RTU mode (8, N, 1), i.e. set 

Pr.09-04 to 12 no matter what the baud rate switch is set. 

RS485 port 

Analog signal common 

Output power 

NOTE 

High/Low baud rate switch 


input terminals 

Analog output 

terminals 

Communication 

indicator Power indicator 


output terminals 


output common terminal 

Please operate by the following steps for switching the high/low baud rate, 

1. make sure that RS-485 cable is disconnected before operation 

2. switch the high/low baud rate 

3. set Pr.09-01 to the corresponding baud rate to finish setting 

If the RS-485 cable is connected before changing the high/low baud rate, the 

communication function will still be invalid even if the communication baud rate (Pr.09-01) is 

changed to the corresponding baud rate and the ERROR indicator is normal. 

Terminals Description 

POWER 

ERROR 

HIGH/LOW 

Power indicator. It will be ON when EMV-APP01 connects to the AC motor drive 

correctly. 

ERROR indicator. It will be ON when EMV-APP01 can communicate with the AC 

motor drive or it will blink. 

Baud rate switch for extension card: 

HIGH: set the baud rate to 115200 

LOW: set the baud rate to 9600 


Terminals Description 

5V Output power 500mA Max 

GND Analog signal common terminal 

SO1-MCM 

SO2-MCM 

NOTE 


This GND terminal is only used for 5V terminal on EMV-APP01. Please do NOT 

confuse with DCM terminal. 

Multi-function analog voltage output terminal 0~10.0V (output current: 2mA Max.) 

Analog output is set by Pr.03-21 and Pr.03-24. 

MI7~MIB Multi-function input terminals 

Please refer to Pr.02-23 to Pr.02-27 for MI7-GND~MIB-GND function selection. 

Take terminals MI7-GND for example, ON: the activation current is 6.5mA and 

OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA. 

MO3~MOA Multi-function output terminals (photocoupler) 

The AC motor drive outputs each monitor signal, such as during operation, 

frequency attained and overload, by transistor with open collector. Please refer 

to Pr.03-35 to Pr.03-42 for details. 

MO3~MOA-MCM 

MO3 

~ 

MOA 

MCM 


Max: 48Vdc/50mA 

MCM Multi-function output common terminal. Max: 48Vdc/50mA 

NOTE 

This MCM terminal is only used with MO3~MOA on EMV-APP01. Please do 

NOT confuse with terminal MCM. 



B.10.2 Dimensions 

B.10.3 Wiring 

Analog signal common 

Output power 

refer to Pr.03-21 to Pr.03-24 



When wiring, please refer to the multi-function input/output function in parameters group 02 

and group 03 of chapter 4 parameters to set by your applications. 


Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive 

The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on 

its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the 

motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the 

required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading. 

But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application 

requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions, 

including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed, 

power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider, 

depending on your requirements. 

Load type 

Load speed and 

torque 

characteristics 

Load 


Item 

Friction load and weight 

load 

Liquid (viscous) load 

Inertia load 

Load with power 

transmission 

Constant torque 

Constant output 

Decreasing torque 

Decreasing output 

Constant load 

Shock load 

Repetitive load 

High starting torque 

Low starting torque 

Speed and 

torque 


Related Specification 

Time 

ratings 

Overload 

capacity 

Starting 

torque 

● ● 

● ● 

● ● ● ● 

Continuous operation, Short-time operation 

Long-time operation at medium/low speeds 

● ● 

Maximum output current (instantaneous) 

Constant output current (continuous) 

● ● 

Maximum frequency, Base frequency 

Power supply transformer capacity or 

percentage impedance 

● 

Voltage fluctuations and unbalance 

Number of phases, single phase protection 

Frequency 

● ● 

Mechanical friction, losses in wiring ● ● 

Duty cycle modification ● 

C.1 Capacity Formulas 

Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 C-1

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| 

1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor 

The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive 

The starting capacity= 

2 

k × N ⎛ GD N ⎞ 

TL 

≤ 1. 

5× 

the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( 

kVA) 

973 cos ⎜ + × 

375 t ⎟ 

× η × ϕ ⎝ 

A ⎠ 

2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor 

2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive 

� Acceleration time ≦60 seconds 


k × N 

η × cos 

n 

⎡ 

⎤ 

s 

⎢ 

⎥ 

[ nT 

+ ns( 

ks 

− 1) ] = PC1⎢1 

+ ( ks 

− 1) 

⎥ ≤ 1. 

5× 

the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( 

kVA) 

ϕ 

⎢ nT 

⎥ 

� Acceleration time ≧60 seconds 


k × N 

η × cos 

⎣ 

n 

n 

C-2 Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 

⎦ 

⎡ 

⎤ 

s 

⎢ 

⎥ 

[ nT 

+ ns( 

ks 

− 1) ] = PC1⎢1 

+ ( ks 

− 1) 

⎥ ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( 

kVA) 

ϕ 

⎢ T ⎥ 

⎣ 

2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A) 

� Acceleration time ≦60 seconds 

nT + S ⎥ × 

⎦ 

� Acceleration time ≧60 seconds 

⎦ 

1 

n 

k 1 1. 

5 the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( 

A) 

n ⎡ S ⎤ 

IM 

⎢ + ⎜ 

⎛ − ⎟ 

⎞ ≤ 

⎣ T ⎝ ⎠ 

nT + S ⎥ ≤ 

⎦ 

1 

n 

k 1 the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( 

A) 

n ⎡ S ⎤ 

IM 

⎢ + ⎜ 

⎛ − 

⎟ 

⎞ 

⎣ T ⎝ ⎠

2.3 When it is running continuously 


� The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA) 

The requirement of load capacity= 

k × PM 

≤ the _ capacity_ 

of _ AC _ motor _ drive( 

kVA) 

η × cosϕ 

� The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive 

k × 

M 

− 3 

3 × VM 

× I × 10 ≤ the_ 

capacity_ 

of _ AC _ motor_ 

drive( 

kVA) 

� The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A) 

k × IM 

≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( 

A) 

Symbol explanation 

P M : Motor shaft output for load (kW) 

η : Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85) 

cos ϕ : Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75) 

V M 

I M 

k 

: Motor rated voltage(V) 

: Motor rated current(A), for commercial power 

: Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on 

PWM method) 

P C1 

: Continuous motor capacity (kVA) 

k S 

: Starting current/rated current of motor 

n T : Number of motors in parallel 

n S : Number of simultaneously started motors 

2 

GD 

T L 

: Total inertia (GD 2 ) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m 2 ) 

: Load torque 

t A : Motor acceleration time 

N : Motor speed 

C.2 General Precaution 



Selection Note 

1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer 

(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents 

may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid 

this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the 

current and improve the input power efficiency. 

2. When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single 

AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated 

currents). 

3. The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current 

and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L. 

(Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If 

higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.) 

use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor 

and the AC Motor Drive. 

4. When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor 

Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an 

external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor. 

Parameter Settings Note 

1. The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some 

models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For 

safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended. 

2. High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may 

cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is 

recommended. 

3. Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia. 

4. If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended 

to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a 

certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the 

required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the 

model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and 

the AC Motor Drive. 

C-4 Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05

C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor 


Standard motor 

When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the 

following precautions: 

1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor. 

2. Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor 

temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the 

motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling. 

3. When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be 

decreased. 

4. The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows: 

torque(%) 

25% 

40% 

100 

82 

70 

60 

50 

0 

Load duty-cycle 

60% 

continuous 

3 6 20 60 

Frequency (Hz) 

5. If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special 

inverter duty motor. 

6. Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating 

speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor. 

7. Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power 

supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be 

connected. 

8. Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the 

following motor vibration problems: 



� Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount 

equipment that runs at varying speed. 

� Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher frequency. 

� To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies. 

9. The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz. 

Special motors: 

1. Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor: 

The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation 

and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number 

the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or 

regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast). 

2. Submersible motor: 

The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation 

and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between 

AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced. 

3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor: 

Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) 

requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special 

precautions. 

4. Gear reduction motor: 

The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation 

will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time 

at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully. 

5. Synchronous motor: 

The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check 

before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC 

motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing 

the motor. 

Power Transmission Mechanism 

Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts 

and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above, 

lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur. 

Motor torque 


torque (%) 

torque (%) 


The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains 

power are different. 

Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW): 

180 

155 

140 

100 

80 

55 

38 

AC motor drive Motor 

60 seconds 

180 

155 

60 seconds 

0 

320 60 120 

0 

320 60 120 

Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) 

Base freq.: 60Hz 


V/F for 220V/60Hz 


140 

130 

Revision Dec. 2008, 04VE, SW V2.05 C-7 

torque (%) 

100 

55 

38 

100 

85 

100 

68 80 

45 

35 

0 

3 20 50 120 




60 seconds 

180 

150 

60 seconds 

torque (%) 

45 

35 

0 

3 20 50 120 



V/F for 220V/50Hz


This page intentionally left blank.

Manual - Delta Electronics

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?